cachepc-linux

Fork of AMDESE/linux with modifications for CachePC side-channel attack
git clone https://git.sinitax.com/sinitax/cachepc-linux
Log | Files | Refs | README | LICENSE | sfeed.txt

mac80211.h (279305B)


      1/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
      2/*
      3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
      4 *
      5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
      6 * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
      7 * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
      8 * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
      9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
     10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation
     11 */
     12
     13#ifndef MAC80211_H
     14#define MAC80211_H
     15
     16#include <linux/bug.h>
     17#include <linux/kernel.h>
     18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
     19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
     20#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
     21#include <net/cfg80211.h>
     22#include <net/codel.h>
     23#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
     24#include <asm/unaligned.h>
     25
     26/**
     27 * DOC: Introduction
     28 *
     29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
     30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
     31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
     32 * drivers.
     33 */
     34
     35/**
     36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
     37 *
     38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
     39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
     40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
     41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
     42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
     43 * tasklet function.
     44 *
     45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
     46 *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
     47 */
     48
     49/**
     50 * DOC: Warning
     51 *
     52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
     53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
     54 */
     55
     56/**
     57 * DOC: Frame format
     58 *
     59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
     60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
     61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
     62 * hardware.
     63 *
     64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
     65 *
     66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
     67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
     68 *
     69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
     70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
     71 */
     72
     73/**
     74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
     75 *
     76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
     77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
     78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
     79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
     80 *
     81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
     82 * suspend.
     83 *
     84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
     85 *
     86 */
     87
     88/**
     89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
     90 *
     91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
     92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
     93 * between different stations/interfaces.
     94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
     95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
     96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
     97 *
     98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
     99 * driver operation.
    100 *
    101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
    102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
    103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
    104 *
    105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
    106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
    107 *
    108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
    109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
    110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
    111 *
    112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
    113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
    114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
    115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
    116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
    117 *
    118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
    119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
    120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
    121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
    122 * .release_buffered_frames().
    123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
    124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
    125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
    126 */
    127
    128struct device;
    129
    130/**
    131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
    132 *
    133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
    134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
    135 */
    136enum ieee80211_max_queues {
    137	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
    138	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
    139};
    140
    141#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
    142
    143/**
    144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
    145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
    146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
    147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
    148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
    149 */
    150enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
    151	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
    152	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
    153	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
    154	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
    155};
    156
    157/**
    158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
    159 *
    160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
    161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
    162 *
    163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
    164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
    165 *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
    166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
    167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
    168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
    169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
    170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
    171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
    172 */
    173struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
    174	u16 txop;
    175	u16 cw_min;
    176	u16 cw_max;
    177	u8 aifs;
    178	bool acm;
    179	bool uapsd;
    180	bool mu_edca;
    181	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
    182};
    183
    184struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
    185	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
    186	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
    187	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
    188	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
    189};
    190
    191/**
    192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
    193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
    194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
    195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
    196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
    197 *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
    198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
    199 */
    200enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
    201	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
    202	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
    203	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
    204	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
    205	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
    206};
    207
    208/**
    209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
    210 *
    211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
    212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
    213 *
    214 * @def: the channel definition
    215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
    216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
    217 *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
    218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
    219 *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
    220 *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
    221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
    222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
    223 *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
    224 */
    225struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
    226	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
    227	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
    228
    229	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
    230
    231	bool radar_enabled;
    232
    233	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
    234};
    235
    236/**
    237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
    238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
    239 *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
    240 *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
    241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
    242 *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
    243 *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
    244 *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
    245 *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
    246 *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
    247 *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
    248 *      for changes/removal.)
    249 */
    250enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
    251	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
    252	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
    253};
    254
    255/**
    256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
    257 *
    258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
    259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
    260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
    261 * done.
    262 *
    263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
    264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
    265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
    266 */
    267struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
    268	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
    269	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
    270	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
    271};
    272
    273/**
    274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
    275 *
    276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
    277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
    278 *
    279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
    280 *	also implies a change in the AID.
    281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
    282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
    283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
    284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
    285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
    286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
    287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
    288 *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
    289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
    290 *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
    291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
    292 *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
    293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
    294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
    295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
    296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
    297 *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
    298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
    299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
    300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
    301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
    302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
    303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
    304 *	changed
    305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
    306 *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
    307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
    308 *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
    309 *	context had been assigned.
    310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
    311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
    312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
    313 *	keep alive) changed.
    314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
    315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
    316 *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
    317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
    318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
    319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
    320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
    321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
    322 *	status changed.
    323 *
    324 */
    325enum ieee80211_bss_change {
    326	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
    327	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
    328	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
    329	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
    330	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
    331	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
    332	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
    333	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
    334	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
    335	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
    336	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
    337	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
    338	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
    339	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
    340	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
    341	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
    342	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
    343	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
    344	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
    345	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
    346	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
    347	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
    348	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
    349	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
    350	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
    351	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
    352	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
    353	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
    354	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
    355	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
    356	BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
    357	BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
    358
    359	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
    360};
    361
    362/*
    363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
    364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
    365 * filtering will be disabled.
    366 */
    367#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
    368
    369/**
    370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
    371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
    372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
    373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
    374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
    375 *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
    376 *	once each time the timeout triggers.
    377 */
    378enum ieee80211_event_type {
    379	RSSI_EVENT,
    380	MLME_EVENT,
    381	BAR_RX_EVENT,
    382	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
    383};
    384
    385/**
    386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
    387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
    388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
    389 */
    390enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
    391	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
    392	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
    393};
    394
    395/**
    396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
    397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
    398 */
    399struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
    400	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
    401};
    402
    403/**
    404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
    405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
    406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
    407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
    408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
    409 */
    410enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
    411	AUTH_EVENT,
    412	ASSOC_EVENT,
    413	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
    414	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
    415};
    416
    417/**
    418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
    419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
    420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
    421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
    422 */
    423enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
    424	MLME_SUCCESS,
    425	MLME_DENIED,
    426	MLME_TIMEOUT,
    427};
    428
    429/**
    430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
    431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
    432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
    433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
    434 */
    435struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
    436	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
    437	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
    438	u16 reason;
    439};
    440
    441/**
    442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
    443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
    444 * @tid: the tid
    445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
    446 */
    447struct ieee80211_ba_event {
    448	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
    449	u16 tid;
    450	u16 ssn;
    451};
    452
    453/**
    454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
    455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
    456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
    457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
    458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
    459 * @u:union holding the fields above
    460 */
    461struct ieee80211_event {
    462	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
    463	union {
    464		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
    465		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
    466		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
    467	} u;
    468};
    469
    470/**
    471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
    472 *
    473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
    474 *
    475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
    476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
    477 */
    478struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
    479	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
    480	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
    481};
    482
    483/**
    484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
    485 *
    486 * @lci: LCI subelement content
    487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
    488 * @lci_len: LCI data length
    489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
    490 */
    491struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
    492	const u8 *lci;
    493	const u8 *civicloc;
    494	size_t lci_len;
    495	size_t civicloc_len;
    496};
    497
    498/**
    499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
    500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
    501 *
    502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
    503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
    504 */
    505struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
    506	u32 min_interval;
    507	u32 max_interval;
    508};
    509
    510/**
    511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
    512 *
    513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
    514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
    515 *
    516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
    517 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
    518 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
    519 *	ACK, BACK or both
    520 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
    521 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
    522 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
    523 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
    524 *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
    525 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
    526 *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
    527 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
    528 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
    529 * @assoc: association status
    530 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
    531 *	or not
    532 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
    533 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
    534 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
    535 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
    536 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
    537 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
    538 *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
    539 *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
    540 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
    541 *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
    542 *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
    543 *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
    544 *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
    545 *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
    546 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
    547 *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
    548 *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
    549 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
    550 *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
    551 *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
    552 *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
    553 *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
    554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
    555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
    556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
    557 *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
    558 *	the current band.
    559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
    560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
    561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
    562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
    563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
    564 *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
    565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
    566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
    567 *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
    568 *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
    569 *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
    570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
    571 *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
    572 *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
    573 *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
    574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
    575 *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
    576 *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
    577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
    578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
    579 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
    580 *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
    581 *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
    582 *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
    583 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
    584 *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
    585 *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
    586 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
    587 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
    588 *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
    589 *	your driver/device needs to do.
    590 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
    591 *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
    592 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
    593 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
    594 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
    595 * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
    596 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
    597 *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
    598 *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
    599 *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
    600 *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
    601 *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
    602 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
    603 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
    604 *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
    605 *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
    606 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
    607 *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
    608 *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
    609 *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
    610 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
    611 *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
    612 *	station.
    613 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
    614 *	responder functionality.
    615 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
    616 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
    617 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
    618 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
    619 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
    620 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
    621 *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
    622 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
    623 *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
    624 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
    625 *	connected to (STA)
    626 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
    627 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
    628 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
    629 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
    630 *	interval.
    631 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
    632 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
    633 *	to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
    634 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
    635 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
    636 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
    637 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
    638 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT
    639 */
    640struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
    641	const u8 *bssid;
    642	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
    643	bool uora_exists;
    644	u8 uora_ocw_range;
    645	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
    646	bool he_support;
    647	bool twt_requester;
    648	bool twt_responder;
    649	bool twt_protected;
    650	bool twt_broadcast;
    651	/* association related data */
    652	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
    653	bool ibss_creator;
    654	u16 aid;
    655	/* erp related data */
    656	bool use_cts_prot;
    657	bool use_short_preamble;
    658	bool use_short_slot;
    659	bool enable_beacon;
    660	u8 dtim_period;
    661	u16 beacon_int;
    662	u16 assoc_capability;
    663	u64 sync_tsf;
    664	u32 sync_device_ts;
    665	u8 sync_dtim_count;
    666	u32 basic_rates;
    667	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
    668	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
    669	u16 ht_operation_mode;
    670	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
    671	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
    672	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
    673	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
    674	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
    675	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
    676	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
    677	int arp_addr_cnt;
    678	bool qos;
    679	bool idle;
    680	bool ps;
    681	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
    682	size_t ssid_len;
    683	bool hidden_ssid;
    684	int txpower;
    685	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
    686	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
    687	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
    688	u16 max_idle_period;
    689	bool protected_keep_alive;
    690	bool ftm_responder;
    691	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
    692	/* Multiple BSSID data */
    693	bool nontransmitted;
    694	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
    695	u8 bssid_index;
    696	u8 bssid_indicator;
    697	bool ema_ap;
    698	u8 profile_periodicity;
    699	struct {
    700		u32 params;
    701		u16 nss_set;
    702	} he_oper;
    703	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
    704	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
    705	struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
    706	u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
    707	bool s1g;
    708	struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
    709	enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
    710	struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
    711	u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
    712	u8 pwr_reduction;
    713	bool eht_support;
    714};
    715
    716/**
    717 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
    718 *
    719 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
    720 *
    721 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
    722 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
    723 *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
    724 *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
    725 *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
    726 *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
    727 *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
    728 *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
    729 *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
    730 *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
    731 *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
    732 *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
    733 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
    734 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
    735 *	station
    736 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
    737 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
    738 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
    739 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
    740 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
    741 *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
    742 *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
    743 *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
    744 *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
    745 *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
    746 *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
    747 *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
    748 *	hardware queue.
    749 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
    750 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
    751 * 	is for the whole aggregation.
    752 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
    753 * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
    754 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
    755 *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
    756 *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
    757 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
    758 *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
    759 *	off-channel operation.
    760 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
    761 *	(header conversion)
    762 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
    763 *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
    764 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
    765 *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
    766 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
    767 *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
    768 *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
    769 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
    770 *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
    771 *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
    772 *	queue gets full.
    773 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
    774 *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
    775 *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
    776 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
    777 *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
    778 *	should kick the MLME state machine.
    779 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
    780 *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
    781 *	status to user space)
    782 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
    783 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
    784 *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
    785 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
    786 *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
    787 *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
    788 *	handled properly by the device.
    789 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
    790 *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
    791 *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
    792 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
    793 *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
    794 *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
    795 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
    796 *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
    797 *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
    798 *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
    799 *	PS-Poll responses.
    800 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
    801 *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
    802 *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
    803 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
    804 *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
    805 *	monitor injection).
    806 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
    807 *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
    808 *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
    809 *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
    810 *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
    811 *
    812 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
    813 *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
    814 */
    815enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
    816	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
    817	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
    818	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
    819	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
    820	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
    821	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
    822	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
    823	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
    824	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
    825	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
    826	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
    827	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
    828	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
    829	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
    830	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP		= BIT(14),
    831	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
    832	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
    833	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
    834	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
    835	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
    836	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
    837	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
    838	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
    839	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
    840	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
    841	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
    842	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
    843	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
    844	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
    845	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
    846	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
    847};
    848
    849#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
    850
    851#define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
    852
    853/**
    854 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
    855 *
    856 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
    857 *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
    858 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
    859 *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
    860 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
    861 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
    862 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
    863 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
    864 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
    865 *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
    866 *	it can be sent out.
    867 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
    868 *	has already been assigned to this frame.
    869 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
    870 *	relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
    871 *	of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
    872 *
    873 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
    874 */
    875enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
    876	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
    877	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
    878	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
    879	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
    880	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
    881	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
    882	IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(6),
    883	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
    884	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER		= BIT(8),
    885};
    886
    887/**
    888 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status
    889 *
    890 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid
    891 *
    892 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags.
    893 */
    894enum mac80211_tx_status_flags {
    895	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0),
    896};
    897
    898/*
    899 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
    900 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
    901 */
    902#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
    903	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
    904	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
    905	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
    906	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
    907	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
    908	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
    909	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
    910
    911/**
    912 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
    913 *	Rate Control algorithm.
    914 *
    915 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
    916 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
    917 *
    918 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
    919 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
    920 *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
    921 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
    922 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
    923 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
    924 *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
    925 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
    926 *	Greenfield mode.
    927 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
    928 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
    929 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
    930 *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
    931 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
    932 *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
    933 *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
    934 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
    935 */
    936enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
    937	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
    938	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
    939	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
    940
    941	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
    942	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
    943	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
    944	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
    945	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
    946	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
    947	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
    948	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
    949	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
    950};
    951
    952
    953/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
    954#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
    955
    956/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
    957#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
    958
    959/* maximum number of rate stages */
    960#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
    961
    962/* maximum number of rate table entries */
    963#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
    964
    965/**
    966 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
    967 *
    968 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
    969 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
    970 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
    971 *
    972 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
    973 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
    974 *
    975 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
    976 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
    977 *
    978 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
    979 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
    980 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
    981 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
    982 * information::
    983 *
    984 *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
    985 *
    986 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
    987 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
    988 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
    989 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
    990 * information should then contain::
    991 *
    992 *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
    993 *
    994 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
    995 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
    996 */
    997struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
    998	s8 idx;
    999	u16 count:5,
   1000	    flags:11;
   1001} __packed;
   1002
   1003#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
   1004
   1005static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
   1006					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
   1007{
   1008	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
   1009	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
   1010	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
   1011}
   1012
   1013static inline u8
   1014ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
   1015{
   1016	return rate->idx & 0xF;
   1017}
   1018
   1019static inline u8
   1020ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
   1021{
   1022	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
   1023}
   1024
   1025/**
   1026 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
   1027 *
   1028 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
   1029 *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
   1030 *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
   1031 *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
   1032 *
   1033 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
   1034 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
   1035 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
   1036 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
   1037 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
   1038 * @control: union part for control data
   1039 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
   1040 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
   1041 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
   1042 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
   1043 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
   1044 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
   1045 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
   1046 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
   1047 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
   1048 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
   1049 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
   1050 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
   1051 * @pad: padding
   1052 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
   1053 * @status: union part for status data
   1054 * @status.rates: attempted rates
   1055 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
   1056 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
   1057 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
   1058 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
   1059 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
   1060 *	used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
   1061 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags
   1062 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
   1063 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
   1064 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
   1065 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
   1066 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
   1067 * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
   1068 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
   1069 * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
   1070 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
   1071 */
   1072struct ieee80211_tx_info {
   1073	/* common information */
   1074	u32 flags;
   1075	u32 band:3,
   1076	    ack_frame_id:13,
   1077	    hw_queue:4,
   1078	    tx_time_est:10;
   1079	/* 2 free bits */
   1080
   1081	union {
   1082		struct {
   1083			union {
   1084				/* rate control */
   1085				struct {
   1086					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
   1087						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
   1088					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
   1089					u8 use_rts:1;
   1090					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
   1091					u8 short_preamble:1;
   1092					u8 skip_table:1;
   1093					/* 2 bytes free */
   1094				};
   1095				/* only needed before rate control */
   1096				unsigned long jiffies;
   1097			};
   1098			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
   1099			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
   1100			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
   1101			u32 flags;
   1102			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
   1103		} control;
   1104		struct {
   1105			u64 cookie;
   1106		} ack;
   1107		struct {
   1108			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
   1109			s32 ack_signal;
   1110			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
   1111			u8 ampdu_len;
   1112			u8 antenna;
   1113			u16 tx_time;
   1114			u8 flags;
   1115			void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)];
   1116		} status;
   1117		struct {
   1118			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
   1119				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
   1120			u8 pad[4];
   1121
   1122			void *rate_driver_data[
   1123				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
   1124		};
   1125		void *driver_data[
   1126			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
   1127	};
   1128};
   1129
   1130static inline u16
   1131ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
   1132{
   1133	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
   1134	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
   1135	 */
   1136	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
   1137	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
   1138}
   1139
   1140static inline u16
   1141ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
   1142{
   1143	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
   1144}
   1145
   1146/***
   1147 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path
   1148 *
   1149 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a
   1150 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet.
   1151 *
   1152 * @rate_idx The actual used rate.
   1153 * @try_count How often the rate was tried.
   1154 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the
   1155 * 	corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level
   1156 * 	that was used when sending the packet.
   1157 */
   1158struct ieee80211_rate_status {
   1159	struct rate_info rate_idx;
   1160	u8 try_count;
   1161	u8 tx_power_idx;
   1162};
   1163
   1164/**
   1165 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
   1166 *
   1167 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
   1168 * @info: Basic tx status information
   1169 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
   1170 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet
   1171 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates)
   1172 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
   1173 */
   1174struct ieee80211_tx_status {
   1175	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
   1176	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
   1177	struct sk_buff *skb;
   1178	struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates;
   1179	u8 n_rates;
   1180
   1181	struct list_head *free_list;
   1182};
   1183
   1184/**
   1185 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
   1186 *
   1187 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
   1188 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
   1189 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
   1190 *
   1191 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
   1192 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
   1193 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
   1194 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
   1195 */
   1196struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
   1197	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
   1198	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
   1199	const u8 *common_ies;
   1200	size_t common_ie_len;
   1201};
   1202
   1203
   1204static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
   1205{
   1206	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
   1207}
   1208
   1209static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
   1210{
   1211	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
   1212}
   1213
   1214/**
   1215 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
   1216 *
   1217 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
   1218 *
   1219 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
   1220 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
   1221 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
   1222 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
   1223 *
   1224 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the
   1225 *	 driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore
   1226 *	 any fields it needs after calling this helper.
   1227 */
   1228static inline void
   1229ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
   1230{
   1231	int i;
   1232
   1233	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
   1234		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
   1235	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
   1236		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
   1237	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
   1238	/* clear the rate counts */
   1239	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
   1240		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
   1241	memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
   1242}
   1243
   1244
   1245/**
   1246 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
   1247 *
   1248 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
   1249 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
   1250 *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
   1251 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
   1252 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
   1253 *	verification has been done by the hardware.
   1254 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
   1255 *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
   1256 *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
   1257 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
   1258 *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
   1259 *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
   1260 *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
   1261 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
   1262 *	de-duplication by itself.
   1263 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
   1264 *	the frame.
   1265 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
   1266 *	the frame.
   1267 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
   1268 *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
   1269 *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
   1270 *	merging.
   1271 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
   1272 *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
   1273 *	(including FCS) was received.
   1274 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
   1275 *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
   1276 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
   1277 *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
   1278 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
   1279 *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
   1280 *	each A-MPDU
   1281 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
   1282 *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
   1283 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
   1284 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
   1285 *	on this subframe
   1286 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
   1287 *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
   1288 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
   1289 *	done by the hardware
   1290 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
   1291 *	processing it in any regular way.
   1292 *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
   1293 *	them for sniffing purposes.
   1294 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
   1295 *	monitor interfaces.
   1296 *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
   1297 *	them for sniffing purposes.
   1298 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
   1299 *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
   1300 *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
   1301 *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
   1302 *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
   1303 *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
   1304 *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
   1305 *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
   1306 *	interleaved with other frames.
   1307 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
   1308 *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
   1309 *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
   1310 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
   1311 *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
   1312 *	the first subframe.
   1313 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
   1314 *	be done in the hardware.
   1315 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
   1316 *	frame
   1317 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
   1318 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
   1319 *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
   1320 *	
   1321 *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
   1322 *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
   1323 *	 - DATA3_CODING
   1324 *	 - DATA5_GI
   1325 *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
   1326 *	 - DATA6_NSTS
   1327 *	 - DATA3_STBC
   1328 *	
   1329 *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
   1330 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
   1331 *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
   1332 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
   1333 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
   1334 *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
   1335 *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
   1336 *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
   1337 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
   1338 *	hardware or driver)
   1339 */
   1340enum mac80211_rx_flags {
   1341	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
   1342	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
   1343	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
   1344	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
   1345	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
   1346	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
   1347	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
   1348	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
   1349	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
   1350	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
   1351	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
   1352	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
   1353	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
   1354	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
   1355	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
   1356	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
   1357	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
   1358	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
   1359	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
   1360	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
   1361	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
   1362	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
   1363	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
   1364	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
   1365	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
   1366	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
   1367	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
   1368	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
   1369	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
   1370	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
   1371	RX_FLAG_8023			= BIT(30),
   1372};
   1373
   1374/**
   1375 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
   1376 *
   1377 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
   1378 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
   1379 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
   1380 *	if the driver fills this value it should add
   1381 *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
   1382 *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
   1383 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
   1384 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
   1385 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
   1386 */
   1387enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
   1388	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
   1389	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
   1390	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
   1391	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
   1392	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
   1393	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
   1394};
   1395
   1396#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
   1397
   1398enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
   1399	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
   1400	RX_ENC_HT,
   1401	RX_ENC_VHT,
   1402	RX_ENC_HE,
   1403};
   1404
   1405/**
   1406 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
   1407 *
   1408 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
   1409 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
   1410 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
   1411 *
   1412 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
   1413 * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
   1414 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
   1415 *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
   1416 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
   1417 *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
   1418 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
   1419 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
   1420 *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
   1421 *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
   1422 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
   1423 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
   1424 *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
   1425 *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
   1426 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
   1427 *	values were filled.
   1428 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
   1429 *	support dB or unspecified units)
   1430 * @antenna: antenna used
   1431 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
   1432 *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
   1433 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
   1434 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
   1435 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
   1436 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
   1437 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
   1438 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
   1439 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
   1440 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
   1441 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
   1442 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
   1443 *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
   1444 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
   1445 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
   1446 */
   1447struct ieee80211_rx_status {
   1448	u64 mactime;
   1449	u64 boottime_ns;
   1450	u32 device_timestamp;
   1451	u32 ampdu_reference;
   1452	u32 flag;
   1453	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
   1454	u8 enc_flags;
   1455	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
   1456	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
   1457	u8 rate_idx;
   1458	u8 nss;
   1459	u8 rx_flags;
   1460	u8 band;
   1461	u8 antenna;
   1462	s8 signal;
   1463	u8 chains;
   1464	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
   1465	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
   1466	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
   1467};
   1468
   1469static inline u32
   1470ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
   1471{
   1472	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
   1473	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
   1474}
   1475
   1476/**
   1477 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
   1478 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
   1479 *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
   1480 *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
   1481 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
   1482 *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
   1483 *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
   1484 *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
   1485 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
   1486 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
   1487 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
   1488 *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
   1489 *	@data field.
   1490 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
   1491 *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
   1492 *	length
   1493 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
   1494 *
   1495 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
   1496 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
   1497 * data.
   1498 */
   1499struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
   1500	u32 present;
   1501	u8 align;
   1502	u8 oui[3];
   1503	u8 subns;
   1504	u8 pad;
   1505	u16 len;
   1506	u8 data[];
   1507} __packed;
   1508
   1509/**
   1510 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
   1511 *
   1512 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
   1513 *
   1514 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
   1515 *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
   1516 *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
   1517 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
   1518 *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
   1519 *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
   1520 *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
   1521 *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
   1522 *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
   1523 *	for more.
   1524 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
   1525 *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
   1526 *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
   1527 *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
   1528 *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
   1529 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
   1530 *	operating channel.
   1531 */
   1532enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
   1533	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
   1534	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
   1535	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
   1536	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
   1537};
   1538
   1539
   1540/**
   1541 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
   1542 *
   1543 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
   1544 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
   1545 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
   1546 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
   1547 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
   1548 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
   1549 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
   1550 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
   1551 *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
   1552 *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
   1553 */
   1554enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
   1555	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
   1556	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
   1557	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
   1558	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
   1559	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
   1560	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
   1561	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
   1562	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
   1563};
   1564
   1565/**
   1566 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
   1567 *
   1568 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
   1569 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
   1570 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
   1571 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
   1572 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
   1573 */
   1574enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
   1575	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
   1576	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
   1577	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
   1578	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
   1579
   1580	/* keep last */
   1581	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
   1582};
   1583
   1584/**
   1585 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
   1586 *
   1587 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
   1588 *
   1589 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
   1590 *
   1591 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
   1592 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
   1593 *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
   1594 *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
   1595 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
   1596 *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
   1597 *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
   1598 *
   1599 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
   1600 *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
   1601 *
   1602 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
   1603 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
   1604 *
   1605 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
   1606 *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
   1607 *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
   1608 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
   1609 *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
   1610 *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
   1611 *
   1612 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
   1613 *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
   1614 *	configured for an HT channel.
   1615 *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
   1616 *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
   1617 */
   1618struct ieee80211_conf {
   1619	u32 flags;
   1620	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
   1621
   1622	u16 listen_interval;
   1623	u8 ps_dtim_period;
   1624
   1625	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
   1626
   1627	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
   1628	bool radar_enabled;
   1629	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
   1630};
   1631
   1632/**
   1633 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
   1634 *
   1635 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
   1636 * operation.
   1637 *
   1638 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
   1639 *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
   1640 *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
   1641 *	the driver passed into mac80211.
   1642 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
   1643 *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
   1644 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
   1645 *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
   1646 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
   1647 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
   1648 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
   1649  *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
   1650  *	channel, expressed in TU.
   1651 */
   1652struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
   1653	u64 timestamp;
   1654	u32 device_timestamp;
   1655	bool block_tx;
   1656	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
   1657	u8 count;
   1658	u32 delay;
   1659};
   1660
   1661/**
   1662 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
   1663 *
   1664 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
   1665 *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
   1666 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
   1667 *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
   1668 *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
   1669 *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
   1670 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
   1671 *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
   1672 *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
   1673 *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
   1674 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
   1675 *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
   1676 *	this is not pure P2P vif.
   1677 */
   1678enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
   1679	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
   1680	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
   1681	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
   1682	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
   1683};
   1684
   1685
   1686/**
   1687 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
   1688 *
   1689 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
   1690 *	The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
   1691 *	It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
   1692 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
   1693 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
   1694 *	The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
   1695 *	mac80211.
   1696 */
   1697
   1698enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
   1699	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED		= BIT(0),
   1700	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR		= BIT(1),
   1701	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED		= BIT(2),
   1702};
   1703
   1704/**
   1705 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
   1706 *
   1707 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
   1708 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
   1709 *
   1710 * @type: type of this virtual interface
   1711 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
   1712 *	or the BSS we're associated to
   1713 * @addr: address of this interface
   1714 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
   1715 *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
   1716 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
   1717 *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
   1718 *	for read access.
   1719 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
   1720 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
   1721 *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
   1722 *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
   1723 *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
   1724 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
   1725 *	These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
   1726 *	.change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
   1727 *	within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
   1728 *	restrictions.
   1729 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
   1730 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
   1731 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
   1732 *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
   1733 *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
   1734 *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
   1735 *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
   1736 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
   1737 *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
   1738 *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
   1739 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
   1740 *	interface.
   1741 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
   1742 *	for this interface.
   1743 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
   1744 *	sizeof(void \*).
   1745 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
   1746 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
   1747 *	protected by fq->lock.
   1748 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
   1749 *	&enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
   1750 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
   1751 *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
   1752 *	for read access.
   1753 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
   1754 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
   1755 */
   1756struct ieee80211_vif {
   1757	enum nl80211_iftype type;
   1758	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
   1759	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
   1760	bool p2p;
   1761	bool csa_active;
   1762	bool mu_mimo_owner;
   1763
   1764	u8 cab_queue;
   1765	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
   1766
   1767	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
   1768
   1769	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
   1770
   1771	u32 driver_flags;
   1772	u32 offload_flags;
   1773
   1774#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
   1775	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
   1776#endif
   1777
   1778	bool probe_req_reg;
   1779	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
   1780
   1781	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
   1782
   1783	bool color_change_active;
   1784	u8 color_change_color;
   1785
   1786	struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
   1787
   1788	/* must be last */
   1789	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
   1790};
   1791
   1792static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
   1793{
   1794#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
   1795	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
   1796#endif
   1797	return false;
   1798}
   1799
   1800/**
   1801 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
   1802 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
   1803 *
   1804 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
   1805 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
   1806 *
   1807 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
   1808 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
   1809 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
   1810 */
   1811struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
   1812
   1813/**
   1814 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
   1815 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
   1816 *
   1817 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
   1818 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
   1819 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
   1820 */
   1821struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   1822
   1823/**
   1824 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
   1825 *
   1826 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
   1827 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
   1828 *
   1829 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
   1830 *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
   1831 *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
   1832 *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
   1833 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
   1834 *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
   1835 *	generation in software.
   1836 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
   1837 *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
   1838 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
   1839 *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
   1840 *	(MFP) to be done in software.
   1841 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
   1842 *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
   1843 *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
   1844 *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
   1845 *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
   1846 *	MIC.
   1847 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
   1848 *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
   1849 *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
   1850 *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
   1851 *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
   1852 *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
   1853 *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
   1854 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
   1855 *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
   1856 *	only for management frames (MFP).
   1857 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
   1858 *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
   1859 *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
   1860 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
   1861 *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
   1862 *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
   1863 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
   1864 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
   1865 *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
   1866 *	generation only
   1867 */
   1868enum ieee80211_key_flags {
   1869	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
   1870	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
   1871	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
   1872	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
   1873	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
   1874	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
   1875	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
   1876	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
   1877	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
   1878	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
   1879	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
   1880};
   1881
   1882/**
   1883 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
   1884 *
   1885 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
   1886 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
   1887 *
   1888 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
   1889 *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
   1890 *	encrypted in hardware.
   1891 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
   1892 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
   1893 *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
   1894 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
   1895 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
   1896 * @keylen: key material length
   1897 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
   1898 * 	data block:
   1899 * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
   1900 * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
   1901 * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
   1902 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
   1903 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
   1904 */
   1905struct ieee80211_key_conf {
   1906	atomic64_t tx_pn;
   1907	u32 cipher;
   1908	u8 icv_len;
   1909	u8 iv_len;
   1910	u8 hw_key_idx;
   1911	s8 keyidx;
   1912	u16 flags;
   1913	u8 keylen;
   1914	u8 key[];
   1915};
   1916
   1917#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
   1918
   1919#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
   1920#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
   1921
   1922/**
   1923 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
   1924 *
   1925 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
   1926 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
   1927 *	reverse order than in packet)
   1928 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
   1929 *	reverse order than in packet)
   1930 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
   1931 *	reverse order than in packet)
   1932 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
   1933 *	reverse order than in packet)
   1934 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
   1935 */
   1936struct ieee80211_key_seq {
   1937	union {
   1938		struct {
   1939			u32 iv32;
   1940			u16 iv16;
   1941		} tkip;
   1942		struct {
   1943			u8 pn[6];
   1944		} ccmp;
   1945		struct {
   1946			u8 pn[6];
   1947		} aes_cmac;
   1948		struct {
   1949			u8 pn[6];
   1950		} aes_gmac;
   1951		struct {
   1952			u8 pn[6];
   1953		} gcmp;
   1954		struct {
   1955			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
   1956			u8 seq_len;
   1957		} hw;
   1958	};
   1959};
   1960
   1961/**
   1962 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
   1963 *
   1964 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
   1965 * the secure packet crypto handling.
   1966 *
   1967 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
   1968 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
   1969 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
   1970 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
   1971 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
   1972 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
   1973 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
   1974 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
   1975 *     key_idx value calculation:
   1976 *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
   1977 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
   1978 */
   1979struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
   1980	u32 cipher;
   1981	u16 iftype;
   1982	u8 hdr_len;
   1983	u8 pn_len;
   1984	u8 pn_off;
   1985	u8 key_idx_off;
   1986	u8 key_idx_mask;
   1987	u8 key_idx_shift;
   1988	u8 mic_len;
   1989};
   1990
   1991/**
   1992 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
   1993 *
   1994 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
   1995 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
   1996 *
   1997 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
   1998 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
   1999 */
   2000enum set_key_cmd {
   2001	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
   2002};
   2003
   2004/**
   2005 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
   2006 *
   2007 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
   2008 *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
   2009 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
   2010 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
   2011 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
   2012 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
   2013 */
   2014enum ieee80211_sta_state {
   2015	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
   2016	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
   2017	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
   2018	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
   2019	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
   2020	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
   2021};
   2022
   2023/**
   2024 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
   2025 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
   2026 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
   2027 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
   2028 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
   2029 *	(including 80+80 MHz)
   2030 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz
   2031 *
   2032 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
   2033 *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
   2034 */
   2035enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
   2036	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
   2037	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
   2038	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
   2039	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
   2040	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320,
   2041};
   2042
   2043/**
   2044 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
   2045 *
   2046 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
   2047 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
   2048 *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
   2049 */
   2050struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
   2051	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
   2052	struct {
   2053		s8 idx;
   2054		u8 count;
   2055		u8 count_cts;
   2056		u8 count_rts;
   2057		u16 flags;
   2058	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
   2059};
   2060
   2061/**
   2062 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
   2063 *
   2064 * Used to configure txpower for station.
   2065 *
   2066 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
   2067 *	to the STA.
   2068 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
   2069 *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
   2070 *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
   2071 *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
   2072 *	per peer TPC.
   2073 */
   2074struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
   2075	s16 power;
   2076	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
   2077};
   2078
   2079#define MAX_STA_LINKS			15
   2080
   2081/**
   2082 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
   2083 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
   2084 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
   2085 *
   2086 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
   2087 *	in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
   2088 *	from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
   2089 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
   2090 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
   2091 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
   2092 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
   2093 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
   2094 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
   2095 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
   2096 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
   2097 *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
   2098 *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
   2099 *	the station moves to associated state.
   2100 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
   2101 *
   2102 */
   2103struct ieee80211_link_sta {
   2104	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
   2105
   2106	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
   2107	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
   2108	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
   2109	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
   2110	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
   2111	struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
   2112
   2113	u8 rx_nss;
   2114	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
   2115	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
   2116};
   2117
   2118/**
   2119 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
   2120 *
   2121 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
   2122 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
   2123 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
   2124 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
   2125 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
   2126 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
   2127 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
   2128 * and holds pointers to various link STA's
   2129 *
   2130 * @addr: MAC address
   2131 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
   2132 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
   2133 *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
   2134 *	Can be modified by driver.
   2135 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
   2136 *	otherwise always false)
   2137 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
   2138 *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
   2139 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
   2140 *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
   2141 *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
   2142 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
   2143 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
   2144 * @rates: rate control selection table
   2145 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
   2146 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
   2147 *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
   2148 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
   2149 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
   2150 *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
   2151 *	unlimited.
   2152 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
   2153 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
   2154 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
   2155 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
   2156 *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
   2157 * @multi_link_sta: Identifies if this sta is a MLD STA
   2158 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
   2159 *	specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
   2160 *	link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
   2161 *	the first added link STA will point to deflink.
   2162 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
   2163 *	i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
   2164 *	would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
   2165 *	STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
   2166 *	@deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
   2167 *	would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
   2168 *	by the AP.
   2169 */
   2170struct ieee80211_sta {
   2171	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
   2172	u16 aid;
   2173	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
   2174	bool wme;
   2175	u8 uapsd_queues;
   2176	u8 max_sp;
   2177	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
   2178	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
   2179	bool tdls;
   2180	bool tdls_initiator;
   2181	bool mfp;
   2182	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
   2183
   2184	/**
   2185	 * @max_amsdu_len:
   2186	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
   2187	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
   2188	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
   2189	 *
   2190	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
   2191	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
   2192	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
   2193	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
   2194	 *
   2195	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
   2196	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
   2197	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
   2198	 */
   2199	u16 max_amsdu_len;
   2200	bool support_p2p_ps;
   2201	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
   2202	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
   2203
   2204	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
   2205
   2206	bool multi_link_sta;
   2207	struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
   2208	struct ieee80211_link_sta *link[MAX_STA_LINKS];
   2209
   2210	/* must be last */
   2211	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
   2212};
   2213
   2214/**
   2215 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
   2216 *
   2217 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
   2218 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
   2219 *
   2220 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
   2221 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
   2222 */
   2223enum sta_notify_cmd {
   2224	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
   2225};
   2226
   2227/**
   2228 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
   2229 *
   2230 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
   2231 * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
   2232 */
   2233struct ieee80211_tx_control {
   2234	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
   2235};
   2236
   2237/**
   2238 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
   2239 *
   2240 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   2241 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
   2242 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
   2243 *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
   2244 * @ac: the AC for this queue
   2245 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
   2246 *
   2247 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
   2248 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
   2249 */
   2250struct ieee80211_txq {
   2251	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
   2252	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
   2253	u8 tid;
   2254	u8 ac;
   2255
   2256	/* must be last */
   2257	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
   2258};
   2259
   2260/**
   2261 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
   2262 *
   2263 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
   2264 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
   2265 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
   2266 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
   2267 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
   2268 *
   2269 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
   2270 *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
   2271 *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
   2272 *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
   2273 *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
   2274 *	algorithm.
   2275 *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
   2276 *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
   2277 *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
   2278 *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
   2279 *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
   2280 *	CCK frames.
   2281 *
   2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
   2283 *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
   2284 *	the FCS at the end.
   2285 *
   2286 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
   2287 *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
   2288 *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
   2289 *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
   2290 *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
   2291 *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
   2292 *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
   2293 *
   2294 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
   2295 *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
   2296 *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
   2297 *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
   2298 *
   2299 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
   2300 *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
   2301 *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
   2302 *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
   2303 *
   2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
   2305 * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
   2306 * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
   2307 *
   2308 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
   2309 *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
   2310 *
   2311 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
   2312 *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
   2313 *
   2314 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
   2315 *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
   2316 *	stack support for dynamic PS.
   2317 *
   2318 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
   2319 *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
   2320 *
   2321 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
   2322 *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
   2323 *
   2324 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
   2325 *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
   2326 *	the stack.
   2327 *
   2328 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
   2329 *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
   2330 *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
   2331 *
   2332 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
   2333 *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
   2334 *	dtim_period).
   2335 *
   2336 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
   2337 *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
   2338 *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
   2339 *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
   2340 *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
   2341 *	only in that case.
   2342 *
   2343 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
   2344 *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
   2345 *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
   2346 *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
   2347 *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
   2348 *	the PS mode of connected stations.
   2349 *
   2350 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
   2351 *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
   2352 *	software.
   2353 *
   2354 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
   2355 *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
   2356 *	active interfaces.
   2357 *
   2358 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
   2359 *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
   2360 *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
   2361 *
   2362 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
   2363 *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
   2364 *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
   2365 *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
   2366 *	supported cipher suites.
   2367 *
   2368 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
   2369 *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
   2370 *	for frames.
   2371 *
   2372 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
   2373 *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
   2374 *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
   2375 *	control for more details.
   2376 *
   2377 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
   2378 *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
   2379 *
   2380 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
   2381 *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
   2382 *	is supported.
   2383 *
   2384 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
   2385 *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
   2386 *
   2387 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
   2388 *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
   2389 *	using aggregation for such frames.)
   2390 *
   2391 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
   2392 *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
   2393 *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
   2394 *	CSA frame.
   2395 *
   2396 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
   2397 *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
   2398 *
   2399 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
   2400 *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
   2401 *
   2402 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
   2403 *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
   2404 *
   2405 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
   2406 *	within A-MPDU.
   2407 *
   2408 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
   2409 *	for sent beacons.
   2410 *
   2411 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
   2412 *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
   2413 *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
   2414 *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
   2415 *
   2416 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
   2417 *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
   2418 *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
   2419 *	timeout.
   2420 *
   2421 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
   2422 *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
   2423 *
   2424 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
   2425 *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
   2426 *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
   2427 *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
   2428 *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
   2429 *
   2430 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
   2431 *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
   2432 *
   2433 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
   2434 *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
   2435 *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
   2436 *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
   2437 *
   2438 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
   2439 *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
   2440 *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
   2441 *
   2442 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
   2443 *	TDLS links.
   2444 *
   2445 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
   2446 *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
   2447 *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
   2448 *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
   2449 *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
   2450 *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
   2451 *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
   2452 *
   2453 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
   2454 *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
   2455 *
   2456 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
   2457 *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
   2458 *
   2459 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
   2460 *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
   2461 *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
   2462 *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
   2463 *	See also the documentation for that flag.
   2464 *
   2465 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
   2466 *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
   2467 *	TXQs to start with.
   2468 *
   2469 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
   2470 *	length in tx status information
   2471 *
   2472 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
   2473 *
   2474 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
   2475 *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
   2476 *
   2477 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
   2478 *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
   2479 *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
   2480 *
   2481 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
   2482 *	offload
   2483 *
   2484 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
   2485 *	offload
   2486 *
   2487 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
   2488 *	decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
   2489 *	If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
   2490 *	usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
   2491 *	the stack.
   2492 *
   2493 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color
   2494 *	collision detection and doesn't need it in software.
   2495 *
   2496 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
   2497 */
   2498enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
   2499	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
   2500	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
   2501	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
   2502	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
   2503	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
   2504	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
   2505	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
   2506	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
   2507	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
   2508	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
   2509	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
   2510	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
   2511	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
   2512	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
   2513	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
   2514	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
   2515	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
   2516	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
   2517	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
   2518	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
   2519	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
   2520	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
   2521	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
   2522	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
   2523	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
   2524	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
   2525	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
   2526	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
   2527	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
   2528	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
   2529	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
   2530	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
   2531	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
   2532	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
   2533	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
   2534	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
   2535	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
   2536	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
   2537	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
   2538	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
   2539	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
   2540	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
   2541	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
   2542	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
   2543	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
   2544	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
   2545	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
   2546	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
   2547	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
   2548	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
   2549	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
   2550	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
   2551	IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION,
   2552
   2553	/* keep last, obviously */
   2554	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
   2555};
   2556
   2557/**
   2558 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
   2559 *
   2560 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
   2561 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
   2562 *
   2563 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
   2564 *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
   2565 *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
   2566 *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
   2567 *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
   2568 *
   2569 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
   2570 *
   2571 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
   2572 *	along with this structure.
   2573 *
   2574 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
   2575 *
   2576 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
   2577 *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
   2578 *
   2579 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
   2580 *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
   2581 *
   2582 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
   2583 *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
   2584 *
   2585 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
   2586 *	that HW supports
   2587 *
   2588 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
   2589 *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
   2590 *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
   2591 *
   2592 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
   2593 *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
   2594 *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
   2595 *
   2596 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
   2597 *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
   2598 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
   2599 *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
   2600 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
   2601 *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
   2602 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
   2603 *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
   2604 *
   2605 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
   2606 *	can handle.
   2607 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
   2608 *	the hw can report back.
   2609 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
   2610 *
   2611 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
   2612 *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
   2613 *	aggregation.
   2614 *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
   2615 *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
   2616 *	it shouldn't be set.
   2617 *
   2618 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
   2619 *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
   2620 *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
   2621 *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
   2622 *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
   2623 *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
   2624 *
   2625 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
   2626 *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
   2627 *
   2628 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
   2629 *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
   2630 *
   2631 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
   2632 *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
   2633 *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
   2634 *	adding _BW is supported today.
   2635 *
   2636 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
   2637 *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
   2638 *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
   2639 *
   2640 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
   2641 *
   2642 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
   2643 *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
   2644 *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
   2645 *	device_timestamp.
   2646 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
   2647 *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
   2648 *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
   2649 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
   2650 *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
   2651 *
   2652 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
   2653 *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
   2654 *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
   2655 *
   2656 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
   2657 *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
   2658 *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
   2659 *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
   2660 *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
   2661 *	neither enabled.
   2662 *
   2663 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
   2664 *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
   2665 *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
   2666 *
   2667 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
   2668 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
   2669 *	supported by HW.
   2670 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
   2671 *	device.
   2672 *
   2673 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
   2674 *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
   2675 *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
   2676 *
   2677 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
   2678 *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
   2679 *
   2680 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
   2681 *
   2682 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware.
   2683 * 	The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions.
   2684 * 	The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level.
   2685 *
   2686 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list.
   2687 */
   2688struct ieee80211_hw {
   2689	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
   2690	struct wiphy *wiphy;
   2691	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
   2692	void *priv;
   2693	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
   2694	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
   2695	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
   2696	int vif_data_size;
   2697	int sta_data_size;
   2698	int chanctx_data_size;
   2699	int txq_data_size;
   2700	u16 queues;
   2701	u16 max_listen_interval;
   2702	s8 max_signal;
   2703	u8 max_rates;
   2704	u8 max_report_rates;
   2705	u8 max_rate_tries;
   2706	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
   2707	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
   2708	u8 max_tx_fragments;
   2709	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
   2710	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
   2711	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
   2712	struct {
   2713		int units_pos;
   2714		s16 accuracy;
   2715	} radiotap_timestamp;
   2716	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
   2717	u8 uapsd_queues;
   2718	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
   2719	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
   2720	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
   2721	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
   2722	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
   2723	u8 weight_multiplier;
   2724	u32 max_mtu;
   2725	const s8 *tx_power_levels;
   2726	u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx;
   2727};
   2728
   2729static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   2730				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
   2731{
   2732	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
   2733}
   2734#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
   2735
   2736static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   2737				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
   2738{
   2739	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
   2740}
   2741#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
   2742
   2743/**
   2744 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
   2745 *
   2746 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
   2747 * @req: cfg80211 request.
   2748 */
   2749struct ieee80211_scan_request {
   2750	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
   2751
   2752	/* Keep last */
   2753	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
   2754};
   2755
   2756/**
   2757 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
   2758 *
   2759 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
   2760 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
   2761 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
   2762 * @status: channel-switch response status
   2763 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
   2764 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
   2765 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
   2766 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
   2767 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
   2768 */
   2769struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
   2770	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
   2771	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
   2772	u8 action_code;
   2773	u32 status;
   2774	u32 timestamp;
   2775	u16 switch_time;
   2776	u16 switch_timeout;
   2777	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
   2778	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
   2779};
   2780
   2781/**
   2782 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
   2783 *
   2784 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
   2785 *
   2786 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
   2787 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
   2788 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
   2789 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
   2790 * is already used internally by mac80211.
   2791 *
   2792 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
   2793 */
   2794struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
   2795
   2796/**
   2797 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
   2798 *
   2799 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
   2800 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
   2801 */
   2802static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
   2803{
   2804	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
   2805}
   2806
   2807/**
   2808 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
   2809 *
   2810 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
   2811 * @addr: the address to set
   2812 */
   2813static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
   2814{
   2815	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
   2816}
   2817
   2818static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
   2819ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   2820		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
   2821{
   2822	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
   2823		return NULL;
   2824	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
   2825}
   2826
   2827static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
   2828ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   2829			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
   2830{
   2831	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
   2832		return NULL;
   2833	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
   2834}
   2835
   2836static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
   2837ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   2838			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
   2839{
   2840	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
   2841		return NULL;
   2842	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
   2843}
   2844
   2845/**
   2846 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
   2847 * @hw: the hardware
   2848 * @skb: the skb
   2849 *
   2850 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
   2851 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
   2852 */
   2853void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
   2854
   2855/**
   2856 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
   2857 *
   2858 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
   2859 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
   2860 *
   2861 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
   2862 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
   2863 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
   2864 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
   2865 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
   2866 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
   2867 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
   2868 *
   2869 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
   2870 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
   2871 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
   2872 *
   2873 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
   2874 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
   2875 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
   2876 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
   2877 *
   2878 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
   2879 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
   2880 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
   2881 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
   2882 *
   2883 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
   2884 *
   2885 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
   2886 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
   2887 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
   2888 * based on the receive flags.
   2889 *
   2890 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
   2891 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
   2892 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
   2893 * keys.
   2894 *
   2895 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
   2896 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
   2897 * handler.
   2898 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
   2899 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
   2900 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
   2901 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
   2902 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
   2903 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
   2904 *
   2905 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
   2906 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
   2907 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
   2908 *
   2909 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
   2910 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
   2911 * requirements:
   2912 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
   2913      once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
   2914   2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
   2915      at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
   2916   3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
   2917      encrypted with the new key when also needing
   2918      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
   2919   4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
   2920   Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
   2921 */
   2922
   2923/**
   2924 * DOC: Powersave support
   2925 *
   2926 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
   2927 *
   2928 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
   2929 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
   2930 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
   2931 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
   2932 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
   2933 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
   2934 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
   2935 * it finds traffic directed to it.
   2936 *
   2937 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
   2938 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
   2939 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
   2940 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
   2941 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
   2942 *
   2943 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
   2944 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
   2945 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
   2946 *
   2947 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
   2948 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
   2949 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
   2950 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
   2951 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
   2952 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
   2953 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
   2954 *
   2955 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
   2956 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
   2957 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
   2958 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
   2959 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
   2960 * periods.
   2961 *
   2962 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
   2963 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
   2964 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
   2965 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
   2966 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
   2967 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
   2968 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
   2969 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
   2970 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
   2971 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
   2972 *
   2973 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
   2974 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
   2975 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
   2976 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
   2977 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
   2978 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
   2979 *
   2980 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
   2981 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
   2982 */
   2983
   2984/**
   2985 * DOC: Beacon filter support
   2986 *
   2987 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
   2988 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
   2989 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
   2990 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
   2991 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
   2992 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
   2993 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
   2994 *
   2995 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
   2996 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
   2997 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
   2998 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
   2999 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
   3000 *
   3001 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
   3002 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
   3003 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
   3004 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
   3005 *
   3006 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
   3007 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
   3008 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
   3009 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
   3010 *
   3011 *  - a list of information element IDs
   3012 *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
   3013 *
   3014 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
   3015 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
   3016 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
   3017 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
   3018 * vendor information elements.
   3019 *
   3020 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
   3021 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
   3022 *
   3023 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
   3024 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
   3025 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
   3026 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
   3027 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
   3028 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
   3029 *
   3030 *
   3031 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
   3032 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
   3033 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
   3034 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
   3035 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
   3036 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
   3037 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
   3038 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
   3039 *
   3040 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
   3041 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
   3042 * signal strength threshold checking.
   3043 */
   3044
   3045/**
   3046 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
   3047 *
   3048 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
   3049 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
   3050 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
   3051 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
   3052 *
   3053 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
   3054 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
   3055 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
   3056 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
   3057 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
   3058 * hardware flags.
   3059 *
   3060 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
   3061 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
   3062 * turned off otherwise.
   3063 *
   3064 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
   3065 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
   3066 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
   3067 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
   3068 */
   3069
   3070/**
   3071 * DOC: Frame filtering
   3072 *
   3073 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
   3074 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
   3075 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
   3076 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
   3077 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
   3078 *
   3079 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
   3080 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
   3081 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
   3082 *
   3083 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
   3084 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
   3085 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
   3086 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
   3087 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
   3088 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
   3089 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
   3090 *
   3091 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
   3092 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
   3093 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
   3094 * or dropped.
   3095 *
   3096 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
   3097 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
   3098 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
   3099 * the flag, but not clear it.
   3100 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
   3101 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
   3102 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
   3103 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
   3104 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
   3105 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
   3106 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
   3107 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
   3108 */
   3109
   3110/**
   3111 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
   3112 *
   3113 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
   3114 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
   3115 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
   3116 *
   3117 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
   3118 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
   3119 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
   3120 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
   3121 * the driver code.
   3122 *
   3123 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
   3124 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
   3125 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
   3126 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
   3127 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
   3128 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
   3129 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
   3130 *
   3131 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
   3132 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
   3133 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
   3134 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
   3135 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
   3136 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
   3137 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
   3138 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
   3139 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
   3140 * @sta_notify callback.
   3141 *
   3142 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
   3143 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
   3144 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
   3145 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
   3146 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
   3147 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
   3148 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
   3149 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
   3150 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
   3151 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
   3152 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
   3153 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
   3154 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
   3155 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
   3156 *
   3157 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
   3158 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
   3159 *
   3160 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
   3161 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
   3162 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
   3163 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
   3164 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
   3165 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
   3166 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
   3167 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
   3168 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
   3169 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
   3170 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
   3171 *
   3172 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
   3173 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
   3174 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
   3175 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
   3176 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
   3177 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
   3178 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
   3179 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
   3180 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
   3181 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
   3182 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
   3183 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
   3184 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
   3185 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
   3186 *
   3187 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
   3188 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
   3189 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
   3190 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
   3191 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
   3192 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
   3193 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
   3194 *
   3195 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
   3196 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
   3197 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
   3198 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
   3199 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
   3200 *
   3201 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
   3202 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
   3203 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
   3204 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
   3205 */
   3206
   3207/**
   3208 * DOC: HW queue control
   3209 *
   3210 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
   3211 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
   3212 * was problematic for a few reasons:
   3213 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
   3214 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
   3215 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
   3216 *
   3217 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
   3218 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
   3219 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
   3220 *
   3221 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
   3222 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
   3223 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
   3224 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
   3225 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
   3226 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
   3227 * the hardware queue.
   3228 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
   3229 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
   3230 *
   3231 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
   3232 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
   3233 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
   3234 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
   3235 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
   3236 *
   3237 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
   3238 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
   3239 * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
   3240 * off-channel queue:         9
   3241 *
   3242 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
   3243 *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
   3244 *
   3245 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
   3246 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
   3247 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
   3248 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
   3249 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
   3250 *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
   3251 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
   3252 *
   3253 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
   3254 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
   3255 *
   3256 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
   3257 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
   3258 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
   3259 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
   3260 */
   3261
   3262/**
   3263 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
   3264 *
   3265 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
   3266 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
   3267 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
   3268 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
   3269 *
   3270 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
   3271 *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
   3272 *	multicast address.
   3273 *
   3274 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
   3275 *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
   3276 *
   3277 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
   3278 *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
   3279 *
   3280 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
   3281 *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
   3282 *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
   3283 *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
   3284 *	honour this flag if possible.
   3285 *
   3286 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
   3287 *	station
   3288 *
   3289 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
   3290 *
   3291 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
   3292 *
   3293 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
   3294 *
   3295 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
   3296 */
   3297enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
   3298	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
   3299	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
   3300	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
   3301	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
   3302	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
   3303	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
   3304	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
   3305	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
   3306	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
   3307};
   3308
   3309/**
   3310 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
   3311 *
   3312 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
   3313 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
   3314 *
   3315 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
   3316 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
   3317 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
   3318 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
   3319 *
   3320 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
   3321 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
   3322 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
   3323 *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
   3324 *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
   3325 *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
   3326 *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
   3327 *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
   3328 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
   3329 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
   3330 *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
   3331 *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
   3332 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
   3333 *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
   3334 *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
   3335 *	session is gone and removes the station.
   3336 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
   3337 *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
   3338 *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
   3339 *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
   3340 */
   3341enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
   3342	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
   3343	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
   3344	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
   3345	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
   3346	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
   3347	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
   3348	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
   3349};
   3350
   3351#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
   3352#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
   3353
   3354/**
   3355 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
   3356 *
   3357 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
   3358 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
   3359 * @tid: tid of the BA session
   3360 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
   3361 *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
   3362 *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
   3363 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
   3364 *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
   3365 *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
   3366 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
   3367 *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
   3368 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
   3369 *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
   3370 */
   3371struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
   3372	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
   3373	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
   3374	u16 tid;
   3375	u16 ssn;
   3376	u16 buf_size;
   3377	bool amsdu;
   3378	u16 timeout;
   3379};
   3380
   3381/**
   3382 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
   3383 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
   3384 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
   3385 *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
   3386 */
   3387enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
   3388	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
   3389	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
   3390};
   3391
   3392/**
   3393 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
   3394 *
   3395 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
   3396 *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
   3397 *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
   3398 *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
   3399 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
   3400 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
   3401 *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
   3402 *	the peer.
   3403 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
   3404 *	by the peer
   3405 */
   3406enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
   3407	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
   3408	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
   3409	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
   3410	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
   3411};
   3412
   3413/**
   3414 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
   3415 *
   3416 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
   3417 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
   3418 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
   3419 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
   3420 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
   3421 *
   3422 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
   3423 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
   3424 *	for sending management frames offchannel.
   3425 */
   3426enum ieee80211_roc_type {
   3427	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
   3428	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
   3429};
   3430
   3431/**
   3432 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
   3433 *
   3434 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
   3435 * reconfiguration type was completed.
   3436 *
   3437 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
   3438 *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
   3439 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
   3440 *	of wowlan configuration)
   3441 */
   3442enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
   3443	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
   3444	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
   3445};
   3446
   3447/**
   3448 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
   3449 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
   3450 *	only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
   3451 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
   3452 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
   3453 *	used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
   3454 *	valid for auth and (re)assoc.
   3455 */
   3456struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
   3457	u16 duration;
   3458	u16 subtype;
   3459	u8 success:1;
   3460};
   3461
   3462/**
   3463 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
   3464 *
   3465 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
   3466 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
   3467 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
   3468 *
   3469 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
   3470 *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
   3471 *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
   3472 *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
   3473 *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
   3474 *	Must be atomic.
   3475 *
   3476 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
   3477 *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
   3478 *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
   3479 *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
   3480 *	or zero.
   3481 *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
   3482 *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
   3483 *	is added.
   3484 *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
   3485 *
   3486 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
   3487 *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
   3488 *	it must turn off frame reception.)
   3489 *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
   3490 *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
   3491 *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
   3492 *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
   3493 *
   3494 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
   3495 *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
   3496 *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
   3497 *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
   3498 *	reconfigured at resume time.
   3499 *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
   3500 *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
   3501 *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
   3502 *	must return 1 from this function.
   3503 *
   3504 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
   3505 *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
   3506 *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
   3507 *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
   3508 *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
   3509 *
   3510 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
   3511 *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
   3512 *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
   3513 *	in suspend().
   3514 *
   3515 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
   3516 *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
   3517 *	and @stop must be implemented.
   3518 *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
   3519 *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
   3520 *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
   3521 *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
   3522 *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
   3523 *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
   3524 *
   3525 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
   3526 *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
   3527 *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
   3528 *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
   3529 *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
   3530 *
   3531 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
   3532 *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
   3533 *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
   3534 *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
   3535 *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
   3536 *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
   3537 *	MAC address of the device going away.
   3538 *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
   3539 *
   3540 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
   3541 *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
   3542 *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
   3543 *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
   3544 *
   3545 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
   3546 *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
   3547 *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
   3548 *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
   3549 *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
   3550 *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
   3551 *	can sleep.
   3552 *
   3553 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
   3554 *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
   3555 *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
   3556 *
   3557 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
   3558 *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
   3559 *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
   3560 *
   3561 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
   3562 *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
   3563 *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
   3564 *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
   3565 *	which flags are changed.
   3566 *	This callback can sleep.
   3567 *
   3568 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
   3569 * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
   3570 *
   3571 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
   3572 *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
   3573 *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
   3574 *	is enabled.
   3575 *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
   3576 *	The callback can sleep.
   3577 *
   3578 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
   3579 * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
   3580 * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
   3581 *	The callback must be atomic.
   3582 *
   3583 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
   3584 *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
   3585 *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
   3586 *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
   3587 *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
   3588 *
   3589 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
   3590 *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
   3591 *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
   3592 *
   3593 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
   3594 *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
   3595 *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
   3596 *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
   3597 *	that power save is disabled.
   3598 *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
   3599 *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
   3600 *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
   3601 *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
   3602 *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
   3603 *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
   3604 *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
   3605 *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
   3606 *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
   3607 *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
   3608 *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
   3609 *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
   3610 *	The callback can sleep.
   3611 *
   3612 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
   3613 *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
   3614 *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
   3615 *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
   3616 *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
   3617 *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
   3618 *	The callback can sleep.
   3619 *
   3620 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
   3621 *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
   3622 *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
   3623 *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
   3624 *
   3625 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
   3626 *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
   3627 *
   3628 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
   3629 *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
   3630 *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
   3631 *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
   3632 *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
   3633 *
   3634 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
   3635 *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
   3636 *	this notification.
   3637 *	The callback can sleep.
   3638 *
   3639 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
   3640 * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
   3641 *	The callback can sleep.
   3642 *
   3643 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
   3644 *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
   3645 *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
   3646 *	The callback must be atomic.
   3647 *
   3648 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
   3649 *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
   3650 *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
   3651 *	should be set as well.
   3652 *	The callback can sleep.
   3653 *
   3654 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
   3655 *	The callback can sleep.
   3656 *
   3657 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
   3658 *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
   3659 *
   3660 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
   3661 *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
   3662 *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
   3663 *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
   3664 *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
   3665 *	This callback can sleep.
   3666 *
   3667 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
   3668 *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
   3669 *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
   3670 *	callback can sleep.
   3671 *
   3672 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
   3673 *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
   3674 *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
   3675 *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
   3676 *
   3677 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
   3678 *	power for the station.
   3679 *	This callback can sleep.
   3680 *
   3681 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
   3682 *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
   3683 *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
   3684 *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
   3685 *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
   3686 *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
   3687 *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
   3688 *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
   3689 *	The callback can sleep.
   3690 *
   3691 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
   3692 *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
   3693 *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
   3694 *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
   3695 *	in @sta_state.
   3696 *	The callback can sleep.
   3697 *
   3698 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
   3699 *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
   3700 *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
   3701 *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
   3702 *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
   3703 *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
   3704 *	Must be atomic.
   3705 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
   3706 *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
   3707 *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
   3708 *
   3709 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
   3710 *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
   3711 *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
   3712 *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
   3713 *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
   3714 *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
   3715 *	The callback can sleep.
   3716 *
   3717 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
   3718 *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
   3719 *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
   3720 *	The callback can sleep.
   3721 *
   3722 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
   3723 *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
   3724 *	required function.
   3725 *	The callback can sleep.
   3726 *
   3727 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
   3728 *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
   3729 *	required function.
   3730 *	The callback can sleep.
   3731 *
   3732 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
   3733 *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
   3734 *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
   3735 *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
   3736 *	The callback can sleep.
   3737 *
   3738 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
   3739 *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
   3740 *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
   3741 *	TSF synchronization.
   3742 *	The callback can sleep.
   3743 *
   3744 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
   3745 *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
   3746 *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
   3747 *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
   3748 *	The callback can sleep.
   3749 *
   3750 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
   3751 *
   3752 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
   3753 *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
   3754 *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
   3755 *	The callback can sleep.
   3756 *
   3757 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
   3758 *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
   3759 *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
   3760 *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
   3761 *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
   3762 *
   3763 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
   3764 *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
   3765 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
   3766 *
   3767 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
   3768 *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
   3769 *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
   3770 *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
   3771 *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
   3772 *	Note that vif can be NULL.
   3773 *	The callback can sleep.
   3774 *
   3775 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
   3776 *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
   3777 *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
   3778 *	completion of the channel switch.
   3779 *
   3780 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
   3781 *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
   3782 *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
   3783 *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
   3784 *
   3785 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
   3786 *
   3787 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
   3788 *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
   3789 *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
   3790 *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
   3791 *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
   3792 *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
   3793 *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
   3794 *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
   3795 *	must be accepted in this case.
   3796 *	This callback may sleep.
   3797 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
   3798 *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
   3799 *
   3800 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
   3801 *
   3802 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
   3803 *
   3804 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
   3805 *	queues before entering power save.
   3806 *
   3807 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
   3808 *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
   3809 *	The callback can sleep.
   3810 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
   3811 *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
   3812 *	The callback must be atomic.
   3813 *
   3814 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
   3815 *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
   3816 *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
   3817 *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
   3818 *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
   3819 *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
   3820 *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
   3821 *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
   3822 *	more-data bit must always be set.
   3823 *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
   3824 *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
   3825 *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
   3826 *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
   3827 *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
   3828 *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
   3829 *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
   3830 *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
   3831 *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
   3832 *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
   3833 *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
   3834 *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
   3835 *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
   3836 *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
   3837 *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
   3838 *	This callback must be atomic.
   3839 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
   3840 *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
   3841 *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
   3842 *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
   3843 *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
   3844 *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
   3845 *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
   3846 *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
   3847 *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
   3848 *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
   3849 *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
   3850 *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
   3851 *	This callback must be atomic.
   3852 *
   3853 * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
   3854 *
   3855 * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
   3856 *
   3857 * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
   3858 *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
   3859 *
   3860 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
   3861 *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
   3862 *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
   3863 *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
   3864 *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
   3865 *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
   3866 *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
   3867 *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
   3868 *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
   3869 *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
   3870 *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
   3871 *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
   3872 *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
   3873 *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
   3874 *	Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
   3875 *	data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
   3876 *	driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
   3877 *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
   3878 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
   3879 *	transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
   3880 *	is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
   3881 *
   3882 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
   3883 *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
   3884 *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
   3885 *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
   3886 *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
   3887 *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
   3888 *	2 * (DTIM period).
   3889 *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
   3890 *
   3891 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
   3892 *	This callback may sleep.
   3893 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
   3894 *	This callback may sleep.
   3895 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
   3896 *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
   3897 *	channel context with different settings
   3898 *	This callback may sleep.
   3899 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
   3900 *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
   3901 *	This callback may sleep.
   3902 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
   3903 *	unbound from vif.
   3904 *	This callback may sleep.
   3905 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
   3906 *	another, as specified in the list of
   3907 *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
   3908 *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
   3909 *	This callback may sleep.
   3910 *
   3911 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
   3912 *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
   3913 *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
   3914 *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
   3915 *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
   3916 *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
   3917 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
   3918 *
   3919 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
   3920 *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
   3921 *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
   3922 *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
   3923 *	This callback may sleep.
   3924 *
   3925 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
   3926 *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
   3927 *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
   3928 *
   3929 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
   3930 *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
   3931 *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
   3932 *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
   3933 *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
   3934 *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
   3935 *	1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
   3936 *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
   3937 *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
   3938 *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
   3939 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
   3940 *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
   3941 *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
   3942 *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
   3943 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
   3944 *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
   3945 *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
   3946 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
   3947 *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
   3948 *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
   3949 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
   3950 *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
   3951 *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
   3952 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
   3953 *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
   3954 *	channel context is bound before this is called.
   3955 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
   3956 *
   3957 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
   3958 *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
   3959 *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
   3960 *
   3961 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
   3962 *	and hardware limits.
   3963 *
   3964 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
   3965 *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
   3966 *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
   3967 *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
   3968 *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
   3969 *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
   3970 *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
   3971 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
   3972 *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
   3973 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
   3974 *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
   3975 *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
   3976 *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
   3977 *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
   3978 *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
   3979 *	the function call.
   3980 *
   3981 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
   3982 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
   3983 *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
   3984 *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
   3985 *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
   3986 *
   3987 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
   3988 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
   3989 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
   3990 *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
   3991 *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
   3992 *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
   3993 *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
   3994 *	changed parameters.
   3995 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
   3996 *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
   3997 *	this call.
   3998 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
   3999 *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
   4000 *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
   4001 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
   4002 *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
   4003 *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
   4004 *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
   4005 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
   4006 *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
   4007 *
   4008 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
   4009 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
   4010 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
   4011 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
   4012 *	This callback may sleep.
   4013 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
   4014 *	This callback may sleep.
   4015 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
   4016 *	4-address mode
   4017 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
   4018 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
   4019 *	to use rx decapsulation offload
   4020 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
   4021 *	This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
   4022 *	are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
   4023 *	The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
   4024 *	twt structure.
   4025 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
   4026 *	from the peer.
   4027 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
   4028 *	radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
   4029 *	or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
   4030 *	Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
   4031 *	switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
   4032 *	radar channel.
   4033 *	The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
   4034 *	disable background CAC/radar detection.
   4035 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
   4036 *	resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
   4037 */
   4038struct ieee80211_ops {
   4039	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4040		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
   4041		   struct sk_buff *skb);
   4042	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4043	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4044#ifdef CONFIG_PM
   4045	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
   4046	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4047	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
   4048#endif
   4049	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4050			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4051	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4052				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4053				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
   4054	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4055				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4056	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
   4057	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4058				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4059				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
   4060				 u32 changed);
   4061
   4062	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4063	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4064
   4065	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4066				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
   4067	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4068				 unsigned int changed_flags,
   4069				 unsigned int *total_flags,
   4070				 u64 multicast);
   4071	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4072				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4073				    unsigned int filter_flags,
   4074				    unsigned int changed_flags);
   4075	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4076		       bool set);
   4077	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
   4078		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4079		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
   4080	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4081				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4082				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
   4083				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4084				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
   4085	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4086			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4087			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
   4088	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4089					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
   4090	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4091		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
   4092	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4093			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4094	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4095				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4096				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
   4097				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
   4098	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4099			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4100	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4101			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4102			      const u8 *mac_addr);
   4103	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4104				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4105	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4106			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
   4107	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4108			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
   4109			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
   4110	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
   4111	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
   4112	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4113		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
   4114	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4115			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
   4116#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
   4117	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4118				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4119				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4120				struct dentry *dir);
   4121#endif
   4122	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4123			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
   4124	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4125			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4126			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
   4127	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4128			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4129			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
   4130			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
   4131	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4132				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4133				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
   4134	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4135			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4136			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4137			      u32 changed);
   4138	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4139				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4140				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
   4141	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4142			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4143			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4144			       struct station_info *sinfo);
   4145	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4146		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
   4147		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
   4148	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4149	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4150			u64 tsf);
   4151	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4152			   s64 offset);
   4153	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4154	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4155
   4156	/**
   4157	 * @ampdu_action:
   4158	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
   4159	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
   4160	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
   4161	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
   4162	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
   4163	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
   4164	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
   4165	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
   4166	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
   4167	 *
   4168	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
   4169	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
   4170	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
   4171	 *
   4172	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
   4173	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
   4174	 *
   4175	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
   4176	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
   4177	 * - ``TX:        81``
   4178	 *
   4179	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
   4180	 *
   4181	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
   4182	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
   4183	 * if the session can start immediately.
   4184	 *
   4185	 * The callback can sleep.
   4186	 */
   4187	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4188			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4189			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
   4190	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
   4191		struct survey_info *survey);
   4192	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4193	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
   4194#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
   4195	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4196			    void *data, int len);
   4197	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
   4198			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
   4199			     void *data, int len);
   4200#endif
   4201	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4202		      u32 queues, bool drop);
   4203	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4204			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4205			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
   4206	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
   4207	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
   4208
   4209	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4210				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4211				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
   4212				 int duration,
   4213				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
   4214	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4215					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4216	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
   4217	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4218			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
   4219	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4220	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4221				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
   4222	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4223			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4224			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
   4225
   4226	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4227				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4228				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
   4229				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
   4230				      bool more_data);
   4231	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4232					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4233					u16 tids, int num_frames,
   4234					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
   4235					bool more_data);
   4236
   4237	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4238				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
   4239	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4240				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4241				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
   4242	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4243				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4244				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
   4245
   4246	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4247				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4248				  struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
   4249	void	(*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4250				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4251				   struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
   4252
   4253	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4254					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4255
   4256	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4257			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
   4258	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4259			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
   4260	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4261			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
   4262			       u32 changed);
   4263	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4264				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4265				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
   4266	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4267				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4268				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
   4269	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4270				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
   4271				  int n_vifs,
   4272				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
   4273
   4274	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4275				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
   4276
   4277#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
   4278	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4279				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4280				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
   4281#endif
   4282	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4283				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4284				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
   4285	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4286				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4287				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
   4288
   4289	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4290				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4291	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4292				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4293	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4294					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4295					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
   4296
   4297	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4298	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4299	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4300				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
   4301	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4302			   int *dbm);
   4303
   4304	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4305				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4306				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
   4307				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
   4308				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
   4309	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4310					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4311					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
   4312	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4313					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4314					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
   4315
   4316	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4317			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
   4318	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4319
   4320	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4321			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4322			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
   4323	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4324			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4325	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4326			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4327			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
   4328	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4329			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4330			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
   4331	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4332			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4333			    u8 instance_id);
   4334	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4335				       struct sk_buff *head,
   4336				       struct sk_buff *skb);
   4337	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4338				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4339				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
   4340	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4341			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
   4342	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4343			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
   4344	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4345			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4346			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4347			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
   4348	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4349				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4350				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
   4351	void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4352				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   4353	void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4354			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
   4355	int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4356			     const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
   4357	void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4358				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4359				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
   4360	void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4361			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4362			      struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
   4363	void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4364				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
   4365	int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4366				    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
   4367	int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4368				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4369				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4370				     struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
   4371				     struct net_device_path *path);
   4372};
   4373
   4374/**
   4375 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
   4376 *
   4377 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
   4378 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
   4379 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
   4380 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
   4381 * @priv_data_len.
   4382 *
   4383 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
   4384 * @ops: callbacks for this device
   4385 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
   4386 *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
   4387 *
   4388 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
   4389 */
   4390struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
   4391					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
   4392					   const char *requested_name);
   4393
   4394/**
   4395 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
   4396 *
   4397 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
   4398 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
   4399 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
   4400 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
   4401 * @priv_data_len.
   4402 *
   4403 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
   4404 * @ops: callbacks for this device
   4405 *
   4406 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
   4407 */
   4408static inline
   4409struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
   4410					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
   4411{
   4412	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
   4413}
   4414
   4415/**
   4416 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
   4417 *
   4418 * You must call this function before any other functions in
   4419 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
   4420 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
   4421 *
   4422 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   4423 *
   4424 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
   4425 */
   4426int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4427
   4428/**
   4429 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
   4430 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
   4431 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
   4432 *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
   4433 */
   4434struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
   4435	int throughput;
   4436	int blink_time;
   4437};
   4438
   4439/**
   4440 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
   4441 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
   4442 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
   4443 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
   4444 *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
   4445 */
   4446enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
   4447	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
   4448	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
   4449	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
   4450};
   4451
   4452#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
   4453const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4454const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4455const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4456const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4457const char *
   4458__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4459				   unsigned int flags,
   4460				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
   4461				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
   4462#endif
   4463/**
   4464 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
   4465 *
   4466 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
   4467 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
   4468 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
   4469 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
   4470 *
   4471 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
   4472 *
   4473 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
   4474 */
   4475static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
   4476{
   4477#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
   4478	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
   4479#else
   4480	return NULL;
   4481#endif
   4482}
   4483
   4484/**
   4485 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
   4486 *
   4487 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
   4488 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
   4489 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
   4490 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
   4491 *
   4492 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
   4493 *
   4494 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
   4495 */
   4496static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
   4497{
   4498#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
   4499	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
   4500#else
   4501	return NULL;
   4502#endif
   4503}
   4504
   4505/**
   4506 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
   4507 *
   4508 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
   4509 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
   4510 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
   4511 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
   4512 *
   4513 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
   4514 *
   4515 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
   4516 */
   4517static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
   4518{
   4519#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
   4520	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
   4521#else
   4522	return NULL;
   4523#endif
   4524}
   4525
   4526/**
   4527 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
   4528 *
   4529 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
   4530 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
   4531 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
   4532 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
   4533 *
   4534 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
   4535 *
   4536 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
   4537 */
   4538static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
   4539{
   4540#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
   4541	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
   4542#else
   4543	return NULL;
   4544#endif
   4545}
   4546
   4547/**
   4548 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
   4549 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
   4550 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
   4551 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
   4552 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
   4553 *
   4554 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
   4555 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
   4556 *
   4557 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
   4558 */
   4559static inline const char *
   4560ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
   4561				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
   4562				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
   4563{
   4564#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
   4565	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
   4566						  blink_table_len);
   4567#else
   4568	return NULL;
   4569#endif
   4570}
   4571
   4572/**
   4573 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
   4574 *
   4575 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
   4576 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
   4577 *
   4578 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
   4579 */
   4580void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4581
   4582/**
   4583 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
   4584 *
   4585 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
   4586 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
   4587 * before calling this function.
   4588 *
   4589 * @hw: the hardware to free
   4590 */
   4591void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4592
   4593/**
   4594 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
   4595 *
   4596 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
   4597 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
   4598 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
   4599 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
   4600 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
   4601 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
   4602 *
   4603 * @hw: the hardware to restart
   4604 */
   4605void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   4606
   4607/**
   4608 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
   4609 *
   4610 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
   4611 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
   4612 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
   4613 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
   4614 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
   4615 *
   4616 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
   4617 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
   4618 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
   4619 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
   4620 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
   4621 *
   4622 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
   4623 *
   4624 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
   4625 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
   4626 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
   4627 * @list: the destination list
   4628 */
   4629void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4630		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
   4631
   4632/**
   4633 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
   4634 *
   4635 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
   4636 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
   4637 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
   4638 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
   4639 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
   4640 *
   4641 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
   4642 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
   4643 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
   4644 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
   4645 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
   4646 *
   4647 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
   4648 *
   4649 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
   4650 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
   4651 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
   4652 * @napi: the NAPI context
   4653 */
   4654void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4655		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
   4656
   4657/**
   4658 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
   4659 *
   4660 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
   4661 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
   4662 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
   4663 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
   4664 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
   4665 *
   4666 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
   4667 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
   4668 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
   4669 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
   4670 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
   4671 *
   4672 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
   4673 *
   4674 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
   4675 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
   4676 */
   4677static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
   4678{
   4679	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
   4680}
   4681
   4682/**
   4683 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
   4684 *
   4685 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
   4686 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
   4687 *
   4688 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
   4689 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
   4690 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
   4691 *
   4692 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
   4693 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
   4694 */
   4695void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
   4696
   4697/**
   4698 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
   4699 *
   4700 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
   4701 * (internally disables bottom halves).
   4702 *
   4703 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
   4704 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
   4705 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
   4706 *
   4707 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
   4708 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
   4709 */
   4710static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4711				   struct sk_buff *skb)
   4712{
   4713	local_bh_disable();
   4714	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
   4715	local_bh_enable();
   4716}
   4717
   4718/**
   4719 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
   4720 *
   4721 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
   4722 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
   4723 * entering/leaving PS mode.
   4724 *
   4725 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
   4726 *
   4727 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
   4728 * each other.
   4729 *
   4730 * @sta: currently connected sta
   4731 * @start: start or stop PS
   4732 *
   4733 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
   4734 */
   4735int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
   4736
   4737/**
   4738 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
   4739 *                                  (in process context)
   4740 *
   4741 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
   4742 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
   4743 * applies.
   4744 *
   4745 * @sta: currently connected sta
   4746 * @start: start or stop PS
   4747 *
   4748 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
   4749 */
   4750static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4751						  bool start)
   4752{
   4753	int ret;
   4754
   4755	local_bh_disable();
   4756	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
   4757	local_bh_enable();
   4758
   4759	return ret;
   4760}
   4761
   4762/**
   4763 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
   4764 * @sta: currently connected station
   4765 *
   4766 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
   4767 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
   4768 * connected station was received.
   4769 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
   4770 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
   4771 * be serialized.
   4772 */
   4773void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
   4774
   4775/**
   4776 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
   4777 * @sta: currently connected station
   4778 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
   4779 *
   4780 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
   4781 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
   4782 * from a connected station was received.
   4783 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
   4784 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
   4785 * serialized.
   4786 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
   4787 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
   4788 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
   4789 * checks.
   4790 */
   4791void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
   4792
   4793/*
   4794 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
   4795 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
   4796 */
   4797#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
   4798
   4799/**
   4800 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
   4801 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
   4802 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
   4803 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
   4804 *
   4805 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
   4806 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
   4807 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
   4808 *
   4809 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
   4810 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
   4811 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
   4812 * call! Beware of the locking!)
   4813 *
   4814 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
   4815 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
   4816 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
   4817 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
   4818 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
   4819 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
   4820 *
   4821 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
   4822 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
   4823 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
   4824 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
   4825 * use this API.
   4826 */
   4827void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4828				u8 tid, bool buffered);
   4829
   4830/**
   4831 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
   4832 *
   4833 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
   4834 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
   4835 * rate selection table for the station entry.
   4836 *
   4837 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   4838 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
   4839 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
   4840 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
   4841 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
   4842 */
   4843void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4844			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4845			    struct sk_buff *skb,
   4846			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
   4847			    int max_rates);
   4848
   4849/**
   4850 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
   4851 *
   4852 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
   4853 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
   4854 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
   4855 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
   4856 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
   4857 * slow stations to starve).
   4858 *
   4859 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
   4860 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
   4861 */
   4862void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
   4863					   u32 thr);
   4864
   4865/**
   4866 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
   4867 *
   4868 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
   4869 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
   4870 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
   4871 *
   4872 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
   4873 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
   4874 * @info: tx status information
   4875 */
   4876void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4877			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
   4878			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
   4879
   4880/**
   4881 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
   4882 *
   4883 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
   4884 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
   4885 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
   4886 *
   4887 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
   4888 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
   4889 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
   4890 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
   4891 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
   4892 *
   4893 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
   4894 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
   4895 */
   4896void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4897			 struct sk_buff *skb);
   4898
   4899/**
   4900 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
   4901 *
   4902 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
   4903 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
   4904 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
   4905 *
   4906 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
   4907 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
   4908 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
   4909 *
   4910 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
   4911 * @status: tx status information
   4912 */
   4913void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4914			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
   4915
   4916/**
   4917 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
   4918 *
   4919 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
   4920 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
   4921 * specific skbs.
   4922 *
   4923 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
   4924 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
   4925 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
   4926 *
   4927 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
   4928 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
   4929 *	(NULL for multicast packets)
   4930 * @info: tx status information
   4931 */
   4932static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4933					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   4934					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
   4935{
   4936	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
   4937		.sta = sta,
   4938		.info = info,
   4939	};
   4940
   4941	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
   4942}
   4943
   4944/**
   4945 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
   4946 *
   4947 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
   4948 *
   4949 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
   4950 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
   4951 * for a single hardware.
   4952 *
   4953 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
   4954 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
   4955 */
   4956static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4957					  struct sk_buff *skb)
   4958{
   4959	local_bh_disable();
   4960	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
   4961	local_bh_enable();
   4962}
   4963
   4964/**
   4965 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
   4966 *
   4967 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
   4968 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
   4969 *
   4970 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
   4971 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
   4972 *
   4973 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
   4974 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
   4975 */
   4976void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4977				 struct sk_buff *skb);
   4978
   4979/**
   4980 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
   4981 *
   4982 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
   4983 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
   4984 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
   4985 * 802.11 frames.
   4986 *
   4987 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
   4988 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
   4989 * calls in the same tx status family.
   4990 *
   4991 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
   4992 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
   4993 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
   4994 */
   4995void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   4996			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   4997			       struct sk_buff *skb);
   4998
   4999/**
   5000 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
   5001 *
   5002 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
   5003 * connected STA.
   5004 *
   5005 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
   5006 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
   5007 */
   5008void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
   5009
   5010#define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
   5011
   5012/**
   5013 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
   5014 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
   5015 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
   5016 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
   5017 *	to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
   5018 *	should be ignored.
   5019 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
   5020 */
   5021struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
   5022	u16 tim_offset;
   5023	u16 tim_length;
   5024
   5025	u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
   5026	u16 mbssid_off;
   5027};
   5028
   5029/**
   5030 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
   5031 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5032 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5033 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
   5034 *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
   5035 *
   5036 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
   5037 * obtain the beacon template.
   5038 *
   5039 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
   5040 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
   5041 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
   5042 * applicable, the CSA count.
   5043 *
   5044 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
   5045 *
   5046 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
   5047 */
   5048struct sk_buff *
   5049ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5050			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   5051			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
   5052
   5053/**
   5054 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
   5055 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5056 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5057 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
   5058 *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
   5059 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
   5060 *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
   5061 *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
   5062 *
   5063 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
   5064 * obtain the beacon frame.
   5065 *
   5066 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
   5067 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
   5068 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
   5069 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
   5070 *
   5071 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
   5072 *
   5073 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
   5074 */
   5075struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5076					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   5077					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
   5078
   5079/**
   5080 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
   5081 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5082 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5083 *
   5084 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
   5085 *
   5086 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
   5087 */
   5088static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5089						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
   5090{
   5091	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
   5092}
   5093
   5094/**
   5095 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
   5096 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5097 *
   5098 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
   5099 * This function is called implicitly when
   5100 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
   5101 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
   5102 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
   5103 *
   5104 * Return: new countdown value
   5105 */
   5106u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   5107
   5108/**
   5109 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
   5110 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5111 * @counter: the new value for the counter
   5112 *
   5113 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
   5114 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
   5115 *
   5116 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
   5117 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
   5118 */
   5119void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
   5120
   5121/**
   5122 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
   5123 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5124 *
   5125 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
   5126 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
   5127 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
   5128 */
   5129void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   5130
   5131/**
   5132 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
   5133 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5134 *
   5135 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
   5136 */
   5137bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   5138
   5139/**
   5140 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
   5141 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5142 *
   5143 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
   5144 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
   5145 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
   5146 */
   5147void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   5148
   5149/**
   5150 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
   5151 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5152 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5153 *
   5154 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
   5155 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
   5156 *
   5157 * Can only be called in AP mode.
   5158 *
   5159 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
   5160 */
   5161struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5162					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   5163
   5164/**
   5165 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
   5166 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5167 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5168 *
   5169 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
   5170 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
   5171 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
   5172 *
   5173 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
   5174 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
   5175 *
   5176 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
   5177 */
   5178struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5179				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   5180
   5181/**
   5182 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
   5183 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5184 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5185 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
   5186 *	if at all possible
   5187 *
   5188 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
   5189 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
   5190 * BSSID and address is used.
   5191 *
   5192 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
   5193 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
   5194 *
   5195 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
   5196 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
   5197 *
   5198 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
   5199 */
   5200struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5201				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   5202				       bool qos_ok);
   5203
   5204/**
   5205 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
   5206 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5207 * @src_addr: source MAC address
   5208 * @ssid: SSID buffer
   5209 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
   5210 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
   5211 *
   5212 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
   5213 * hardware.
   5214 *
   5215 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
   5216 */
   5217struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5218				       const u8 *src_addr,
   5219				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
   5220				       size_t tailroom);
   5221
   5222/**
   5223 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
   5224 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5225 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5226 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
   5227 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
   5228 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
   5229 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
   5230 *
   5231 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
   5232 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
   5233 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
   5234 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
   5235 */
   5236void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   5237		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
   5238		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
   5239		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
   5240
   5241/**
   5242 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
   5243 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5244 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5245 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
   5246 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
   5247 *
   5248 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
   5249 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
   5250 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
   5251 *
   5252 * Return: The duration.
   5253 */
   5254__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5255			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
   5256			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
   5257
   5258/**
   5259 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
   5260 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5261 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5262 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
   5263 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
   5264 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
   5265 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
   5266 *
   5267 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
   5268 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
   5269 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
   5270 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
   5271 */
   5272void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5273			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   5274			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
   5275			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
   5276			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
   5277
   5278/**
   5279 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
   5280 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5281 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5282 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
   5283 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
   5284 *
   5285 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
   5286 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
   5287 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
   5288 *
   5289 * Return: The duration.
   5290 */
   5291__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5292				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   5293				    size_t frame_len,
   5294				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
   5295
   5296/**
   5297 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
   5298 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5299 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5300 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
   5301 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
   5302 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
   5303 *
   5304 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
   5305 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
   5306 *
   5307 * Return: The duration.
   5308 */
   5309__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5310					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   5311					enum nl80211_band band,
   5312					size_t frame_len,
   5313					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
   5314
   5315/**
   5316 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
   5317 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5318 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   5319 *
   5320 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
   5321 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
   5322 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
   5323 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
   5324 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
   5325 *
   5326 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
   5327 * frames are available.
   5328 *
   5329 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
   5330 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
   5331 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
   5332 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
   5333 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
   5334 * use common code for all beacons.
   5335 */
   5336struct sk_buff *
   5337ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   5338
   5339/**
   5340 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
   5341 *
   5342 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
   5343 *
   5344 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
   5345 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
   5346 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
   5347 */
   5348void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
   5349			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
   5350
   5351/**
   5352 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
   5353 *
   5354 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
   5355 * from the given packet.
   5356 *
   5357 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
   5358 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
   5359 *	with this P1K
   5360 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
   5361 */
   5362static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
   5363					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
   5364{
   5365	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
   5366	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
   5367	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
   5368
   5369	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
   5370}
   5371
   5372/**
   5373 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
   5374 *
   5375 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
   5376 * and transmitter address.
   5377 *
   5378 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
   5379 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
   5380 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
   5381 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
   5382 */
   5383void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
   5384			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
   5385
   5386/**
   5387 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
   5388 *
   5389 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
   5390 * in the packet.
   5391 *
   5392 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
   5393 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
   5394 *	encrypted with this key
   5395 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
   5396 */
   5397void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
   5398			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
   5399
   5400/**
   5401 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
   5402 *
   5403 * @pos: start of crypto header
   5404 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
   5405 * @pn: PN to add
   5406 *
   5407 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
   5408 * the packet payload)
   5409 *
   5410 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
   5411 * point to the crypto header)
   5412 */
   5413u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
   5414
   5415/**
   5416 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
   5417 *
   5418 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
   5419 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
   5420 *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
   5421 *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
   5422 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
   5423 *
   5424 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
   5425 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
   5426 * by the device and not by mac80211.
   5427 *
   5428 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
   5429 * can be done concurrently.
   5430 */
   5431void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
   5432			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
   5433
   5434/**
   5435 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
   5436 *
   5437 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
   5438 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
   5439 *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
   5440 *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
   5441 * @seq: new sequence data
   5442 *
   5443 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
   5444 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
   5445 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
   5446 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
   5447 *
   5448 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
   5449 * can be done concurrently.
   5450 */
   5451void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
   5452			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
   5453
   5454/**
   5455 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
   5456 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
   5457 *
   5458 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
   5459 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
   5460 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
   5461 *
   5462 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
   5463 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
   5464 */
   5465void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
   5466
   5467/**
   5468 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
   5469 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
   5470 * @keyconf: new key data
   5471 *
   5472 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
   5473 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
   5474 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
   5475 *
   5476 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
   5477 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
   5478 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
   5479 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
   5480 *
   5481 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
   5482 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
   5483 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
   5484 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
   5485 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
   5486 * of the reconfiguration.
   5487 *
   5488 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
   5489 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
   5490 *
   5491 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
   5492 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
   5493 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
   5494 * the key that's being replaced.
   5495 */
   5496struct ieee80211_key_conf *
   5497ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   5498			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
   5499
   5500/**
   5501 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
   5502 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
   5503 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
   5504 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
   5505 * @gfp: allocation flags
   5506 */
   5507void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
   5508				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
   5509
   5510/**
   5511 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
   5512 *
   5513 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
   5514 * at the same time.
   5515 *
   5516 * @keyconf: the key in question
   5517 */
   5518void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
   5519
   5520/**
   5521 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
   5522 *
   5523 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
   5524 * at the same time.
   5525 *
   5526 * @keyconf: the key in question
   5527 */
   5528void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
   5529
   5530/**
   5531 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
   5532 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5533 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
   5534 *
   5535 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
   5536 */
   5537void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
   5538
   5539/**
   5540 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
   5541 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5542 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
   5543 *
   5544 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
   5545 */
   5546void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
   5547
   5548/**
   5549 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
   5550 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5551 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
   5552 *
   5553 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
   5554 *
   5555 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
   5556 */
   5557
   5558int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
   5559
   5560/**
   5561 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
   5562 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5563 *
   5564 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
   5565 */
   5566void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   5567
   5568/**
   5569 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
   5570 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   5571 *
   5572 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
   5573 */
   5574void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   5575
   5576/**
   5577 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
   5578 *
   5579 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
   5580 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
   5581 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
   5582 * any context, including hardirq context.
   5583 *
   5584 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
   5585 * @info: information about the completed scan
   5586 */
   5587void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5588			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
   5589
   5590/**
   5591 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
   5592 *
   5593 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
   5594 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
   5595 *
   5596 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
   5597 */
   5598void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   5599
   5600/**
   5601 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
   5602 *
   5603 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
   5604 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
   5605 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
   5606 * while associating, for instance.
   5607 *
   5608 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
   5609 */
   5610void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   5611
   5612/**
   5613 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
   5614 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
   5615 *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
   5616 *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
   5617 *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
   5618 *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
   5619 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
   5620 *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
   5621 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
   5622 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
   5623 *	is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
   5624 *	for instance.
   5625 */
   5626enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
   5627	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
   5628	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
   5629	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
   5630	IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER	= BIT(2),
   5631};
   5632
   5633/**
   5634 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
   5635 *
   5636 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
   5637 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
   5638 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
   5639 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
   5640 *
   5641 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
   5642 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
   5643 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
   5644 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
   5645 */
   5646void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
   5647				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
   5648						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
   5649				  void *data);
   5650
   5651/**
   5652 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
   5653 *
   5654 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
   5655 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
   5656 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
   5657 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
   5658 * be used.
   5659 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
   5660 *
   5661 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
   5662 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
   5663 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
   5664 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
   5665 */
   5666static inline void
   5667ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
   5668				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
   5669						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
   5670				    void *data)
   5671{
   5672	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
   5673				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
   5674				     iterator, data);
   5675}
   5676
   5677/**
   5678 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
   5679 *
   5680 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
   5681 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
   5682 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
   5683 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
   5684 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
   5685 *
   5686 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
   5687 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
   5688 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
   5689 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
   5690 */
   5691void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5692						u32 iter_flags,
   5693						void (*iterator)(void *data,
   5694						    u8 *mac,
   5695						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
   5696						void *data);
   5697
   5698/**
   5699 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
   5700 *
   5701 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
   5702 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
   5703 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
   5704 * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in
   5705 * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within
   5706 * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks.
   5707 *
   5708 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
   5709 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
   5710 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
   5711 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
   5712 */
   5713void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5714					     u32 iter_flags,
   5715					     void (*iterator)(void *data,
   5716						u8 *mac,
   5717						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
   5718					     void *data);
   5719
   5720/**
   5721 * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations
   5722 *
   5723 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
   5724 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
   5725 * function for them.
   5726 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
   5727 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used.
   5728 *
   5729 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
   5730 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
   5731 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
   5732 */
   5733void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5734				void (*iterator)(void *data,
   5735						 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
   5736				void *data);
   5737
   5738/**
   5739 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
   5740 *
   5741 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
   5742 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
   5743 * function for them.
   5744 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
   5745 *
   5746 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
   5747 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
   5748 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
   5749 */
   5750void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5751				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
   5752						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
   5753				       void *data);
   5754/**
   5755 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
   5756 *
   5757 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
   5758 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
   5759 *
   5760 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
   5761 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
   5762 */
   5763void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
   5764
   5765/**
   5766 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
   5767 *
   5768 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
   5769 * workqueue.
   5770 *
   5771 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
   5772 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
   5773 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
   5774 */
   5775void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5776				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
   5777				  unsigned long delay);
   5778
   5779/**
   5780 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
   5781 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
   5782 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
   5783 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
   5784 *
   5785 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
   5786 *
   5787 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
   5788 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
   5789 * will be managed by the mac80211.
   5790 */
   5791int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
   5792				  u16 timeout);
   5793
   5794/**
   5795 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
   5796 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
   5797 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
   5798 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
   5799 *
   5800 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
   5801 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
   5802 * from any context.
   5803 */
   5804void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
   5805				      u16 tid);
   5806
   5807/**
   5808 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
   5809 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
   5810 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
   5811 *
   5812 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
   5813 *
   5814 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
   5815 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
   5816 * will be managed by the mac80211.
   5817 */
   5818int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
   5819
   5820/**
   5821 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
   5822 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
   5823 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
   5824 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
   5825 *
   5826 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
   5827 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
   5828 * can be called from any context.
   5829 */
   5830void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
   5831				     u16 tid);
   5832
   5833/**
   5834 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
   5835 *
   5836 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
   5837 * @addr: station's address
   5838 *
   5839 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
   5840 *
   5841 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
   5842 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
   5843 */
   5844struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   5845					 const u8 *addr);
   5846
   5847/**
   5848 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
   5849 *
   5850 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   5851 * @addr: remote station's address
   5852 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
   5853 *
   5854 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
   5855 *
   5856 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
   5857 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
   5858 *
   5859 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
   5860 *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
   5861 *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
   5862 *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
   5863 *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
   5864 *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
   5865 *      is not reliable.
   5866 *
   5867 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
   5868 */
   5869struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5870					       const u8 *addr,
   5871					       const u8 *localaddr);
   5872
   5873/**
   5874 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
   5875 * @hw: the hardware
   5876 * @pubsta: the station
   5877 * @block: whether to block or unblock
   5878 *
   5879 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
   5880 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
   5881 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
   5882 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
   5883 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
   5884 *
   5885 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
   5886 * manner.
   5887 *
   5888 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
   5889 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
   5890 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
   5891 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
   5892 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
   5893 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
   5894 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
   5895 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
   5896 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
   5897 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
   5898 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
   5899 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
   5900 * woke up while blocked or not.
   5901 */
   5902void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   5903			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
   5904
   5905/**
   5906 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
   5907 * @pubsta: the station
   5908 *
   5909 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
   5910 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
   5911 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
   5912 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
   5913 *
   5914 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
   5915 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
   5916 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
   5917 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
   5918 *
   5919 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
   5920 *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
   5921 *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
   5922 *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
   5923 */
   5924void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
   5925
   5926/**
   5927 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
   5928 * @pubsta: the station
   5929 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
   5930 *
   5931 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
   5932 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
   5933 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
   5934 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
   5935 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
   5936 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
   5937 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
   5938 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
   5939 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
   5940 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
   5941 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
   5942 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
   5943 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
   5944 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
   5945 */
   5946void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
   5947
   5948/**
   5949 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
   5950 *
   5951 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
   5952 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
   5953 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
   5954 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
   5955 *
   5956 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
   5957 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
   5958 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
   5959 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
   5960 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
   5961 * attempts.
   5962 *
   5963 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
   5964 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
   5965 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
   5966 * them to 0.
   5967 *
   5968 * @pubsta: the station
   5969 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
   5970 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
   5971 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
   5972 */
   5973void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
   5974				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
   5975
   5976/**
   5977 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
   5978 *
   5979 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   5980 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
   5981 *
   5982 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
   5983 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
   5984 */
   5985bool
   5986ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
   5987
   5988/**
   5989 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
   5990 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   5991 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
   5992 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
   5993 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
   5994 *
   5995 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
   5996 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
   5997 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
   5998 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
   5999 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
   6000 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
   6001 *
   6002 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
   6003 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
   6004 * set_key callback.
   6005 */
   6006void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6007			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6008			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6009				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6010				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   6011				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
   6012				      void *data),
   6013			 void *iter_data);
   6014
   6015/**
   6016 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
   6017 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6018 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
   6019 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
   6020 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
   6021 *
   6022 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
   6023 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
   6024 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
   6025 * in removal process will be skipped.
   6026 *
   6027 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
   6028 * and thus iter must be atomic.
   6029 */
   6030void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6031			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6032			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6033					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6034					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   6035					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
   6036					  void *data),
   6037			     void *iter_data);
   6038
   6039/**
   6040 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
   6041 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   6042 * @iter: iterator function
   6043 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
   6044 *
   6045 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
   6046 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
   6047 * places while calling into the driver.
   6048 *
   6049 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
   6050 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
   6051 * removed.
   6052 *
   6053 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
   6054 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
   6055 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
   6056 * or not.
   6057 */
   6058void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
   6059	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6060	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6061		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
   6062		     void *data),
   6063	void *iter_data);
   6064
   6065/**
   6066 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
   6067 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   6068 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6069 *
   6070 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
   6071 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
   6072 * information. This function must only be called from within the
   6073 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
   6074 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
   6075 * %NULL.
   6076 *
   6077 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
   6078 */
   6079struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6080					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   6081
   6082/**
   6083 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
   6084 *
   6085 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6086 *
   6087 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
   6088 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
   6089 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
   6090 */
   6091void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   6092
   6093/**
   6094 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
   6095 *
   6096 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6097 *
   6098 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
   6099 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
   6100 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
   6101 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
   6102 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
   6103 *
   6104 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
   6105 * without connection recovery attempts.
   6106 */
   6107void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   6108
   6109/**
   6110 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
   6111 *
   6112 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6113 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
   6114 *
   6115 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
   6116 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
   6117 */
   6118void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
   6119
   6120/**
   6121 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
   6122 *
   6123 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6124 *
   6125 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
   6126 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
   6127 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
   6128 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
   6129 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
   6130 *
   6131 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
   6132 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
   6133 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
   6134 * disconnect normally later.
   6135 *
   6136 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
   6137 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
   6138 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
   6139 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
   6140 */
   6141void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   6142
   6143/**
   6144 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after
   6145 * hardware restart
   6146 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6147 *
   6148 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after
   6149 * hardware restart.
   6150 */
   6151void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   6152
   6153/**
   6154 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
   6155 *	rssi threshold triggered
   6156 *
   6157 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6158 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
   6159 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
   6160 * @gfp: context flags
   6161 *
   6162 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
   6163 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
   6164 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
   6165 */
   6166void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6167			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
   6168			       s32 rssi_level,
   6169			       gfp_t gfp);
   6170
   6171/**
   6172 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
   6173 *
   6174 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6175 * @gfp: context flags
   6176 */
   6177void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
   6178
   6179/**
   6180 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
   6181 *
   6182 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6183 */
   6184void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   6185
   6186/**
   6187 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
   6188 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6189 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
   6190 *
   6191 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
   6192 * and wake up the suspended queues.
   6193 */
   6194void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
   6195
   6196/**
   6197 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
   6198 * @vif &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6199 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
   6200 *
   6201 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
   6202 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
   6203 * a deauth frame in this case.
   6204 */
   6205void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6206					 bool block_tx);
   6207
   6208/**
   6209 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
   6210 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6211 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
   6212 *
   6213 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
   6214 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
   6215 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
   6216 */
   6217void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6218			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
   6219
   6220/**
   6221 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
   6222 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6223 */
   6224void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   6225
   6226/**
   6227 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
   6228 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6229 */
   6230void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   6231
   6232/**
   6233 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
   6234 *
   6235 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
   6236 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
   6237 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
   6238 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
   6239 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
   6240 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
   6241 *
   6242 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6243 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
   6244 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
   6245 */
   6246void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
   6247				  const u8 *addr);
   6248
   6249/**
   6250 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
   6251 * @pubsta: station struct
   6252 * @tid: the session's TID
   6253 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
   6254 *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
   6255 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
   6256 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
   6257 *
   6258 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
   6259 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
   6260 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
   6261 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
   6262 */
   6263void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
   6264					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
   6265					  u16 received_mpdus);
   6266
   6267/**
   6268 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
   6269 *
   6270 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
   6271 * buffer.
   6272 *
   6273 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6274 * @ra: the peer's destination address
   6275 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
   6276 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
   6277 */
   6278void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
   6279
   6280/**
   6281 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
   6282 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
   6283 * @addr: station mac address
   6284 * @tid: the rx tid
   6285 */
   6286void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
   6287				 unsigned int tid);
   6288
   6289/**
   6290 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
   6291 *
   6292 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
   6293 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
   6294 * reordering.
   6295 *
   6296 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
   6297 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
   6298 *
   6299 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
   6300 * @addr: station mac address
   6301 * @tid: the rx tid
   6302 */
   6303static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6304						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
   6305{
   6306	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
   6307		return;
   6308	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
   6309}
   6310
   6311/**
   6312 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
   6313 *
   6314 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
   6315 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
   6316 * reordering.
   6317 *
   6318 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
   6319 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
   6320 *
   6321 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
   6322 * @addr: station mac address
   6323 * @tid: the rx tid
   6324 */
   6325static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6326						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
   6327{
   6328	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
   6329		return;
   6330	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
   6331}
   6332
   6333/**
   6334 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
   6335 *
   6336 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
   6337 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
   6338 *
   6339 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
   6340 *
   6341 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
   6342 * @addr: station mac address
   6343 * @tid: the rx tid
   6344 */
   6345void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6346				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
   6347
   6348/* Rate control API */
   6349
   6350/**
   6351 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
   6352 *
   6353 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
   6354 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
   6355 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
   6356 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
   6357 *	to be filled in
   6358 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
   6359 *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
   6360 *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
   6361 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
   6362 *	RTS threshold
   6363 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
   6364 *	if the selected rate supports it
   6365 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
   6366 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
   6367 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
   6368 */
   6369struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
   6370	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
   6371	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
   6372	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
   6373	struct sk_buff *skb;
   6374	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
   6375	bool rts, short_preamble;
   6376	u32 rate_idx_mask;
   6377	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
   6378	bool bss;
   6379};
   6380
   6381/**
   6382 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
   6383 */
   6384enum rate_control_capabilities {
   6385	/**
   6386	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
   6387	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
   6388	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
   6389	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
   6390	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
   6391	 */
   6392	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
   6393	/**
   6394	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
   6395	 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
   6396	 */
   6397	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
   6398};
   6399
   6400struct rate_control_ops {
   6401	unsigned long capa;
   6402	const char *name;
   6403	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
   6404	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
   6405			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
   6406	void (*free)(void *priv);
   6407
   6408	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
   6409	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
   6410			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
   6411			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
   6412	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
   6413			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
   6414			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
   6415			    u32 changed);
   6416	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   6417			 void *priv_sta);
   6418
   6419	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
   6420			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
   6421			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
   6422	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
   6423			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
   6424			  struct sk_buff *skb);
   6425	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
   6426			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
   6427
   6428	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
   6429				struct dentry *dir);
   6430
   6431	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
   6432};
   6433
   6434static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
   6435				 enum nl80211_band band,
   6436				 int index)
   6437{
   6438	return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
   6439}
   6440
   6441static inline s8
   6442rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
   6443		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
   6444{
   6445	int i;
   6446
   6447	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
   6448		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
   6449			return i;
   6450
   6451	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
   6452	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
   6453
   6454	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
   6455	return 0;
   6456}
   6457
   6458static inline
   6459bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
   6460			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
   6461{
   6462	unsigned int i;
   6463
   6464	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
   6465		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
   6466			return true;
   6467	return false;
   6468}
   6469
   6470/**
   6471 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
   6472 *
   6473 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
   6474 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
   6475 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
   6476 * the most recent rate control module decision.
   6477 *
   6478 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6479 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
   6480 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
   6481 */
   6482int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6483			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
   6484			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
   6485
   6486int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
   6487void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
   6488
   6489static inline bool
   6490conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
   6491{
   6492	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
   6493}
   6494
   6495static inline bool
   6496conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
   6497{
   6498	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
   6499	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
   6500}
   6501
   6502static inline bool
   6503conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
   6504{
   6505	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
   6506	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
   6507}
   6508
   6509static inline bool
   6510conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
   6511{
   6512	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
   6513}
   6514
   6515static inline bool
   6516conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
   6517{
   6518	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
   6519		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
   6520		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
   6521}
   6522
   6523static inline enum nl80211_iftype
   6524ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
   6525{
   6526	if (p2p) {
   6527		switch (type) {
   6528		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
   6529			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
   6530		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
   6531			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
   6532		default:
   6533			break;
   6534		}
   6535	}
   6536	return type;
   6537}
   6538
   6539static inline enum nl80211_iftype
   6540ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
   6541{
   6542	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
   6543}
   6544
   6545/**
   6546 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
   6547 *
   6548 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
   6549 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
   6550 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
   6551 *
   6552 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
   6553 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
   6554 * matching GroupId management frame.
   6555 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
   6556 */
   6557void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6558				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
   6559
   6560void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6561				   int rssi_min_thold,
   6562				   int rssi_max_thold);
   6563
   6564void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   6565
   6566/**
   6567 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
   6568 *
   6569 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
   6570 *
   6571 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
   6572 *
   6573 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
   6574 * applicable.
   6575 */
   6576int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   6577
   6578/**
   6579 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
   6580 * @vif: virtual interface
   6581 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
   6582 * @gfp: allocation flags
   6583 *
   6584 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
   6585 */
   6586void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6587				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
   6588				    gfp_t gfp);
   6589
   6590/**
   6591 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
   6592 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6593 * @vif: virtual interface
   6594 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
   6595 * @band: the band to transmit on
   6596 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
   6597 *
   6598 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
   6599 */
   6600bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6601			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
   6602			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
   6603
   6604/**
   6605 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
   6606 *				 of injected frames.
   6607 *
   6608 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
   6609 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
   6610 * of the skb before calling this function.
   6611 *
   6612 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
   6613 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
   6614 */
   6615bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
   6616				 struct net_device *dev);
   6617
   6618/**
   6619 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
   6620 *
   6621 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
   6622 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
   6623 *
   6624 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
   6625 *
   6626 * private:
   6627 *
   6628 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
   6629 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
   6630 */
   6631struct ieee80211_noa_data {
   6632	u32 next_tsf;
   6633	bool has_next_tsf;
   6634
   6635	u8 absent;
   6636
   6637	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
   6638	struct {
   6639		u32 start;
   6640		u32 duration;
   6641		u32 interval;
   6642	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
   6643};
   6644
   6645/**
   6646 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
   6647 *
   6648 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
   6649 * @data: NoA tracking data
   6650 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
   6651 *
   6652 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
   6653 */
   6654int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
   6655			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
   6656
   6657/**
   6658 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
   6659 *
   6660 * @data: NoA tracking data
   6661 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
   6662 */
   6663void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
   6664
   6665/**
   6666 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
   6667 * @vif: virtual interface
   6668 * @peer: the peer's destination address
   6669 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
   6670 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
   6671 * @gfp: allocation flags
   6672 *
   6673 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
   6674 */
   6675void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
   6676				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
   6677				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
   6678
   6679/**
   6680 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
   6681 *
   6682 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
   6683 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
   6684 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
   6685 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
   6686 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
   6687 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
   6688 *
   6689 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
   6690 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
   6691 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
   6692 *
   6693 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
   6694 * @tid: the TID to reserve
   6695 *
   6696 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
   6697 */
   6698int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
   6699
   6700/**
   6701 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
   6702 *
   6703 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
   6704 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
   6705 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
   6706 *
   6707 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
   6708 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
   6709 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
   6710 *
   6711 * @sta: the station
   6712 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
   6713 */
   6714void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
   6715
   6716/**
   6717 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
   6718 *
   6719 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6720 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
   6721 *	ieee80211_next_txq()
   6722 *
   6723 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
   6724 *
   6725 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
   6726 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
   6727 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
   6728 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
   6729 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
   6730 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
   6731 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
   6732 *
   6733 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
   6734 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
   6735 */
   6736struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6737				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
   6738
   6739/**
   6740 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
   6741 * (in process context)
   6742 *
   6743 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
   6744 * (internally disables bottom halves).
   6745 *
   6746 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6747 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
   6748 *	ieee80211_next_txq()
   6749 */
   6750static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6751						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
   6752{
   6753	struct sk_buff *skb;
   6754
   6755	local_bh_disable();
   6756	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
   6757	local_bh_enable();
   6758
   6759	return skb;
   6760}
   6761
   6762/**
   6763 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
   6764 *
   6765 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6766 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
   6767 *
   6768 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
   6769 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
   6770 * driver has finished scheduling it.
   6771 */
   6772struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
   6773
   6774/**
   6775 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
   6776 *
   6777 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6778 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
   6779 *
   6780 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
   6781 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
   6782 */
   6783void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
   6784
   6785/* (deprecated) */
   6786static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
   6787{
   6788}
   6789
   6790/**
   6791 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
   6792 *
   6793 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6794 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
   6795 *
   6796 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
   6797 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
   6798 *
   6799 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
   6800 * this TXQ internally.
   6801 */
   6802void ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
   6803
   6804/**
   6805 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
   6806 *
   6807 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6808 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
   6809 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
   6810 *
   6811 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
   6812 * internally.
   6813 */
   6814void ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
   6815			  bool force);
   6816
   6817/**
   6818 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
   6819 *
   6820 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
   6821 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
   6822 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
   6823 * next_txq().
   6824 *
   6825 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
   6826 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
   6827 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
   6828 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
   6829 * again.
   6830 *
   6831 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
   6832 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
   6833 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
   6834 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
   6835 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
   6836 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
   6837 *
   6838 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6839 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
   6840 */
   6841bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6842				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
   6843
   6844/**
   6845 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
   6846 *
   6847 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
   6848 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
   6849 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
   6850 *
   6851 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
   6852 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
   6853 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
   6854 */
   6855void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
   6856			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
   6857			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
   6858
   6859/**
   6860 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
   6861 *
   6862 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
   6863 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
   6864 *
   6865 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6866 * @inst_id: the local instance id
   6867 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
   6868 * @gfp: allocation flags
   6869 */
   6870void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6871				   u8 inst_id,
   6872				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
   6873				   gfp_t gfp);
   6874
   6875/**
   6876 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
   6877 *
   6878 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
   6879 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
   6880 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
   6881 *
   6882 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6883 * @match: match event information
   6884 * @gfp: allocation flags
   6885 */
   6886void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6887			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
   6888			      gfp_t gfp);
   6889
   6890/**
   6891 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
   6892 *
   6893 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
   6894 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
   6895 *
   6896 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6897 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
   6898 *          information.
   6899 * @len: frame length in bytes
   6900 */
   6901u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6902			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
   6903			      int len);
   6904
   6905/**
   6906 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
   6907 *
   6908 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
   6909 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
   6910 *
   6911 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
   6912 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
   6913 * @len: frame length in bytes
   6914 */
   6915u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6916			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
   6917			      int len);
   6918/**
   6919 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
   6920 *
   6921 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
   6922 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
   6923 * hardware or firmware.
   6924 *
   6925 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6926 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
   6927 */
   6928bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
   6929
   6930/**
   6931 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
   6932 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   6933 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6934 *
   6935 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
   6936 *
   6937 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
   6938 */
   6939struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6940						  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   6941
   6942/**
   6943 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
   6944 *	probe response template.
   6945 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
   6946 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6947 *
   6948 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
   6949 *
   6950 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
   6951 */
   6952struct sk_buff *
   6953ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
   6954					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
   6955
   6956/**
   6957 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
   6958 * collision.
   6959 *
   6960 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
   6961 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
   6962 *	aware of.
   6963 */
   6964void
   6965ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
   6966				       u64 color_bitmap);
   6967
   6968/**
   6969 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
   6970 *
   6971 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
   6972 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
   6973 *
   6974 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
   6975 */
   6976static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
   6977{
   6978	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
   6979	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
   6980
   6981	return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
   6982	       ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
   6983}
   6984
   6985#endif /* MAC80211_H */